JP5170965B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and for example, a game ball is driven into the game area as a game medium. The game balls that are driven into the game area flow down along the game board.

  In the game area, a number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at an appropriate position in the vertical direction of the game area. In addition, the game area is provided with a start port that can accept a game ball that is driven toward the game area. When a game ball is received at the starting port, a special symbol lottery is performed. When the lottery is won, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated.

  This type of gaming machine is provided with an effect image display device capable of displaying various effect images. In this effect image display device, although the reach effect is performed in order to make the player expect that he / she has won in the lottery by the special symbol lottery, the game itself is monotonous. Then, it is going to excite interest by performing the several reach production from which a selection rate differs so that expectation differs for every reach production (for example, refer to patent documents 1).

JP-A-8-168559

  However, although the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a different expectation for each reach effect, even if a reach effect with a low expectation is performed, the game machine cannot be interested in the reach effect itself and becomes ruined. In addition, reach production with high expectation has a low frequency of occurrence. As a result, the player's interest in the reach effect is diminished, and the interest may be reduced.

  On the other hand, there is a gaming machine provided with an effect that suggests whether or not to perform a reach effect before performing the reach effect, or that provides an effect different from the effect image display means. However, even with this type of gaming machine, the expectation is low if the production has a high occurrence frequency, and the expectation is high if the production has a low occurrence frequency, so a fundamental solution has not been achieved.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

A gaming machine according to the present invention for solving the above-described problems is capable of accepting a game board in which a game area is formed and a game medium is driven toward the game area, and a game medium driven toward the game area. A first start port, a first game mode display means arranged in the game area of the game board and displaying a predetermined game mode, and arranged in the game area of the game board and displaying predetermined game information First game information display means, first start detection means for detecting that the game medium driven toward the game area is received by the first start port, and detection of game media by the first start detection means First lottery means for performing lottery according to the first game mode display control means for displaying in a predetermined manner on the first game mode display unit and for deriving a lottery result by the first lottery unit, 1 lottery The first holding means for holding the lottery result by the stage within the first predetermined number of ranges for deriving the first game aspect display means by the first game aspect display control means, and the first holding means hold The first game information display control means for displaying the held number-of-holds information on the first game information display means, and a display mode for deriving to the first game mode display means by the first game mode display control means Among a plurality of display modes stored in the game display mode storage means, a plurality of game display mode storage means for storing, and a display mode derived to the first game mode display means by the first game mode display control means The first display mode determining means for selecting and determining from the game, and a special game that allows a player to be given a predetermined game value in response to winning the lottery by the first lottery means A first game control means having at least a special game execution means, wherein the game display mode storage means is selected and determined only when the lottery result by the first lottery means is winning 2 The above winning display mode is selected and determined when the lottery result by the first lottery means is off, and corresponds to any one of the two or more winning display modes, and the corresponding winning display mode Two or more reach out-of-reach display modes that are similar to each other over time and at least one out-of-reach display mode that resembles part of the reach out-of-display mode over time are stored, and the first display The mode determination means performs display according to the reach-off display mode in a lottery that is different from the lottery result by the first lottery means and the lottery result by the first lottery means is off. Only when it is selected and determined, the game machine has a reach out-of-reach display mode selection determining means for selecting and determining a predetermined out-of-reach display mode from the two or more out-of-reach display modes. A second start port capable of receiving a game medium driven toward the game area; a second game mode display means arranged in the game area of the game board; and displaying a predetermined game mode; A second game information display means arranged in the game area of the game board and displaying predetermined game information; and a second game information detecting means for detecting that a game medium driven toward the game area is received by the second start port. 2 start detection means, second lottery means for performing lottery in response to detection of game medium by the second start detection means, and display in a predetermined manner in the second game state display means and the second lottery A second game mode display control means for deriving a lottery result according to the stage, and a second game mode display control means for deriving the lottery result by the second lottery means to the second game mode display means. Second holding means for holding within a predetermined number of ranges, second game information display control means for displaying on-second information information held by the second holding means on the second game information display means, and the second Second display mode determining means for selecting and determining a display mode to be derived to the first game mode display unit by the two game mode display control units from among a plurality of display modes stored in the game display mode storage unit; And a second game control means having at least a special game value for the player in response to the fact that the special game state generation means has won the lottery by the second lottery means. The game display mode storage means stores a plurality of display modes derived by the second game mode display control means to the second game mode display means. The display mode is similar to the winning display mode and has a display time shorter than that of the winning display mode, and is selected and determined only when the lottery result by the second lottery means is win. Two or more winning special modes and a selection and determination when the lottery result by the second lottery means is out of correspondence and corresponding to at least the two or more winning special display modes and a part of the corresponding special winning display mode And two or more reach-off special display modes that are clearly different from the above-described display mode, and a part that closely resembles with time.
The second display mode determining means, when the lottery result by the second lottery means is out, selects and determines a predetermined reach out special display mode from among the two or more reach out special display modes. It has an aspect selection determination means.

  According to this, the game board is provided with the first start port, the first game mode display means, the first game information display means, and the first game control means. The first game control means includes a first start detection means for detecting that a game medium is received at the first start port, and a first lottery means for performing a lottery in response to detection of the game medium by the first start detection means. And a first game symbol display control means for displaying in a predetermined manner on the first special symbol display, and a lottery result obtained by the first special symbol lottery means by the first special symbol display control means. First holding means for holding the information within the first predetermined number of ranges, and first game information for displaying the number-of-holds information held by the first special symbol hold counter on the first special symbol hold indicator Display control means. The game board further includes a first special symbol by a second start port, a second game mode display means, a second game information display means, a second game control means, and a first special symbol display control means. The first special symbol display unit is selected by the first display mode determining means for selecting and determining the display mode derived from the display unit from the plurality of display modes stored in the display mode storage unit, and the first special symbol display control unit. Game display mode storage means for storing a plurality of modes to be derived, and special game execution means for executing a special game that can give a predetermined game value to a player in response to a lottery winning by the first special symbol lottery means , Is provided. The second game control means includes a second start detecting means for detecting that the game medium is received at the second start opening or the third start opening, and a lottery according to the detection of the game medium by the second start detecting means. A second lottery means for performing, a second game symbol display control means for deriving a lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means while displaying in a predetermined display manner on the second special symbol display, and a second special symbol lottery A second holding means for holding the lottery result by the means to the second special symbol display means by the second special symbol display control means within a second predetermined number of ranges, and a hold held by the second special hold counter The second game information display control means for displaying the number information on the second special symbol hold display device, and the display mode derived to the second special symbol display device by the second special symbol display control means are recorded in the display mode storage means. A second display mode decision means for selecting determined from among the plurality of display modes to be, are provided. The display mode storage means also stores a plurality of display modes derived to the second special symbol display by the second special symbol display control means. The jackpot game execution means also executes the jackpot game in response to winning the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means. The display mode storage means is selected when two or more winning display modes are selected and determined only when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means is win, and when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means is off, Two or more out-of-reach display modes corresponding to any one of the two or more hit display modes and a display mode that closely resembles the corresponding hit display mode over time, and part of the out-of-reach display mode And a display mode that closely resembles the winning display mode over time and a display mode that is shorter in display time than the winning display mode, and at least wins the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means. Two or more winning special display modes that are selected and determined only at certain times, and when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means is out of the selection, the winning selection is at least two or more. Two or more reach-off special display modes that correspond to the special display mode and include a part that closely resembles a part of the corresponding hit special display mode over time, the display mode being clearly different from the display mode. Is remembered. In the first display mode determining means, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means is out of the lottery, and it is selected and decided to display in the reach out of display mode in a lottery different from the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means Only in this case, there is provided reach outlier display mode selection deciding means for selecting and deciding a predetermined reach outlier display mode from among two or more reach outlier display modes. When the lottery result by the symbol lottery means is out, a reach out special display mode selection determining unit for selecting and determining a predetermined reach out special display mode from among two or more reach out special display modes is provided.

  According to the present invention, interest can be suppressed by reducing interest in reach production.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Overall configuration of pachinko machine]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame 3 is opened on one side of the outer frame of the pachinko machine 1 and the front frame is opened on one side of the main body frame 3. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the entire front side of the pachinko machine. In FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the decorative member in the game area 37 is omitted.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, a front frame 4, a game board 5, and the like. The outer frame 2 is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame shape by upper, lower, left, and right wooden frame members, and has a lower receiving plate 6 that receives the lower surface of the main body frame 3 at the front lower portion of the outer frame 2. A main body frame 3 is attached to one side of the entire surface of the outer frame 2 by a hinge mechanism 7 so as to be opened and closed forward. The outer frame 2 may be formed of a light metal such as resin or aluminum.

[Body frame configuration]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the main body frame 3 and the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 separated from the upper right front.

  The main body frame 3 is configured by integrally molding the front frame body 11, the game board mounting frame 12 and the mechanism mounting body 13 with a synthetic resin or the like. The front frame body 11 of the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape excluding the support plate 6 on the front side of the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 1). A body frame side hinge device 15 is fixed to the upper and lower portions of one side of the front frame body 11, and hinge pins and hinge holes are provided to the outer frame side hinge device 14 fixed to the upper and lower portions of one side of the outer frame 2. It is mounted so that it can be opened and closed freely. That is, the hinge mechanism 7 is constituted by the outer frame side hinge device 14, the main body frame side hinge device 15, the hinge pin, and the hinge hole.

  On the front side of the front frame body 11, a speaker box portion 16 is integrally formed in the front lower left area of the front frame body 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, and is formed in the front opening portion of the speaker box portion 16. The speaker mounting plate 17 is mounted so as to close the opening. A speaker 18 is mounted on the speaker mounting board.

  In the lower region of the front surface of the front frame 11, a firing rail 19 is attached to the upper half of the front frame 11 in an inclined manner. A lower front plate 30 is mounted on the lower half of the lower area of the front surface of the front frame 11. A lower tray 31 capable of storing game balls is provided at a substantially central portion of the front surface of the lower front plate 30, an operation handle 32 is provided on the right side, and an ashtray 33 is provided on the left side. . The lower plate 31 is provided with a ball discharge lever 34 for discharging the game ball downward.

[Configuration of the front frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. The front frame 4 is mounted on one side of the front surface of the front frame body 11 so as to cover a portion extending from the upper end of the front frame body 11 to the upper edge of the lower front plate 30 so as to be opened and closed forward by a hinge mechanism 36. Yes.

  A substantially circular opening window 38 through which a game area 37 formed on the surface of the game board 5 can be seen through from the front is formed at a substantially central portion of the front frame 4. A window frame 39 having a rectangular frame shape larger than the opening window 38 is provided on the rear side of the front frame 4, and a transparent plate 50 such as a glass plate or a transparent resin plate is attached to the window frame 39. A substantially entire front surface of the front frame 4 is decorated by a front decoration member in which a lamp or the like is provided, and an upper plate 51 is formed at a lower portion of the front surface of the front frame 4. Specifically, in the periphery of the opening window 38, side decoration devices 52 are mounted on the left and right sides, an upper plate 51 is mounted on the lower portion, and an acoustic lighting device 53 is mounted on the upper portion.

  The side decoration device 52 is mainly configured by a side decoration body 54 in which a lamp driving substrate is disposed and formed of a synthetic resin material. A plurality of slit-like opening holes that are long in the horizontal direction are arranged in the side decoration body 54 in the vertical direction, and a lens 55 corresponding to the light source disposed on the lamp driving substrate is incorporated in the opening hole. The acoustic illumination device 53 includes a transparent cover body 56, a speaker 57, a speaker cover 58, a reflector body (not shown), and the like, and these constituent members are assembled together to form a unit.

  An effect selection switch 35 is provided on the left side of the front surface of the upper plate 51. The effect selection switch 35 is configured to be pressed by the player himself. When the player depresses the effect selection switch 35, the player's intention can be reflected in the effect display on the effect image display device 115 described later. Note that a lever or a switch may be used instead of the effect selection switch 35. Moreover, the voice input means which receives a player's voice may be sufficient. In other words, any device that reflects the player's intention is acceptable.

[Configuration of locking device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 3. A function of locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and a function of locking the front frame 4 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the rear side of the free end side opposite to the hinge mechanism 36 of the front frame body 11 The locking device 70 having both of the above is mounted.

  That is, in this embodiment, the locking device 70 includes a plurality of upper and lower body frame locking hooks 72 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 71 provided on the outer frame 2 to lock the body frame 3 in a closed state, From the front of the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of upper and lower door locking hooks 74 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 73 provided on the rear side of the free end side of the front frame 4 to lock the front frame 4 in a closed state. And a cylinder lock 75 exposed through the front frame body 11 and the lower front plate 30 so that the key can be inserted and unlocked. Then, a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 75 and rotated in one direction, so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 72 and the closing tool 71 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is unlocked. By rotating in the opposite direction, the engagement between the door locking hook 74 and the closing tool 73 of the front frame 4 is released and the front frame 4 is unlocked.

[Composition of game board mounting frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3 is provided on the rear side of the front frame body 11 and the game board 5 is mounted so as to be attachable / detachable from the front. .

  The game board 5 is formed in a substantially square plate shape having a size to be fitted from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 (see FIG. 11). A guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 is provided on the board surface (front surface) of the game board 5, and a game area 37 is defined inside the guide rail 78.

  A predetermined gap is provided between the launch rail 19 and the guide rail 78, and when the launched game ball returns to the guide rail 78, the game ball is discharged from the gap. The lower plate 31 is guided.

  Further, a front structural member 79 made of synthetic resin is attached to the front surface of the game board 5 in the outer region of the guide rail 78.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4, the lower part on the rear side of the game board 5 receives a game ball that has flowed into the various winning devices in a portion extending from the center part to the lower part, and serves as a collective bag for guiding the game ball to a predetermined position. A box mounting base 118 having both the above function and the function as a box mounting portion is provided.

  A peripheral control board box 130 in which peripheral control boards 610 such as a voice control board and a lamp control board are accommodated is mounted on the box mounting base 118, and is superposed on the rear side of the peripheral control board box 130 in a state where it is superposed. A main control board box 132 in which the control board 510 is housed is mounted.

  Further, in a state where the box mounting base 118, the peripheral control board box 130 and the main control board box 132 are respectively mounted on the rear side of the game board 5, the game board 5 is moved from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3. The box mounting base 118, the peripheral control board box 130, and the main control board box 132 are arranged without protruding outside the outline of the game board 5 so that they can be fitted and installed.

[Structure of body mounting mechanism, ball tank and tank rail]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing the state in which various members are assembled to the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 from the diagonally upper right rear, and FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing the main body frame 3 alone from the diagonally upper right rear.

  A tank mounting portion 133, a rail mounting portion 134, a dispensing device mounting portion 135, and the like are formed on the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3, and a ball tank 136 is mounted on the tank mounting portion 133.

  The ball tank 136 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is formed in a box shape opening upward so that a large number of game balls supplied from the island facility can be stored. The storage state of the game balls in the ball tank 136 is visible through the rear side wall of the ball tank 136.

  In addition, a discharge port 138 for discharging a game ball is formed at the rear corner of the bottom plate portion 137 of the ball tank 136, and the bottom plate portion 137 is formed on an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the discharge port 138. .

  The mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3 is integrally formed with a rail mounting portion 134 so as to approach the tank mounting portion 133 downward, and the rail component 139 is mounted on the rail mounting portion 134 so that the tank rail 150 is configured. That is, in this embodiment, the rail mounting portion 134 is formed in a state in which the upper lateral portion of the main body frame 3 is recessed by a predetermined depth, and the rear side wall of the recess is used as the front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150. An inclined rail shelf 155 is formed along the lower edge of the concave portion so as to incline downward from one end (left side in FIG. 8) to the other end (right end in FIG. 8). An upward surface extending in the lateral direction of the rail shelf 155 is a rail receiving portion 158.

  The rail constituting member 139 that is mounted on the rail mounting portion 134 and constitutes the tank rail 150 includes a rear wall portion 152 that forms a rail passage between the rail mounting portion 134 and the front wall portion 151, and an inclined lower plate And a partition wall (both not shown) that project along the center in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate part and divide the rail passage into front and rear rows (in this embodiment, front and rear rows). It is formed in preparation.

  The rail constituting member 139 is attached to the rail attaching portion 134 by an appropriate attachment means, whereby the tank rail 150 having a plurality of front and rear rail passages is configured. Then, after the game balls discharged from the discharge port 138 of the ball tank 136 (dropped by its own weight) are received at one end of the rail passages in the front and rear rows of the tank rail 150, the game balls are moved along the rail passage by their own weight. And rolling toward the other end of the rail passage.

  Further, in this embodiment, the rail component member 139 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, whereby the flow state of the game balls in the rail passage is visually recognized through the rear wall portion 152 of the rail component member 139. It is possible.

  The front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150 (rail mounting portion 134) has a first space portion in order to avoid interference with the rear upper end portion of equipment (for example, the center accessory 300) that protrudes to the rear side of the game board 5. It is provided in a separated state.

  In this embodiment, the rear end of the rail shelf 155 serving as the rear end portion of the main body frame 3 and the rear wall portion of the tank rail 150 are substantially flush with the rear side wall of the ball tank 136. In other words, the tank rail 150 is arranged rearwardly from the rear surface of the game board 5 until the rear wall portion of the ball tank 136 is substantially flush with the rear wall portion of the ball tank 136. Thus, a first space portion for avoiding interference with the rear portion of the center accessory 300 is provided between the rear side of the game board 5 and the front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150.

  Above the tank rail 150, a rectifier 156 for aligning the game balls flowing in the rail passage without overlapping each other is mounted on the upper portion thereof so as to be swingable about the shaft 157. The rectifier 156 is provided with a weight from the center to the bottom.

[Configuration of payout device mounting part and ball payout device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. A vertically long paying device mounting portion 135 corresponding to a ball paying device (ball paying unit) 170 described below is formed in the vertical direction of one side of the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3. The dispensing device mounting portion 135 is formed in a concave shape having an opening on the rear side.

  In addition, an opening 173 through which a payout motor 172 (see FIG. 3) of the ball payout device 170 can project is formed at a predetermined position of a back wall portion (not shown) having a stepped shape of the payout device mounting portion 135. Yes.

  In a state where the ball paying device 170 is mounted in the recess of the paying device mounting portion 135, a second space portion is provided between the game board 5 and the first space portion, which is at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction. . Thus, the rail passage and the ball passage are arranged at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the rear end of the body frame 3, that is, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion of the dispensing device mounting portion 135, the rear end of the rail shelf 155, the rear surfaces of the ball tank 136, the tank rail 150, and the ball dispensing device 170 are substantially the same surface. There is no.

  The ball payout device 170 has a vertically long box shape that is substantially the same size as the recess of the payout device mounting portion 135, and is unitized by mounting various parts related to payout.

  The ball payout device 170 is fitted from the rear opening of the recess of the payout device mounting portion 135 and is mounted by appropriate mounting means (for example, mounting means such as an elastic clip, a locking claw, and a screw). ing.

  Although not shown, the ball dispensing device 170 is formed by dividing the ball passages having inflow ports respectively communicating with the outlets of the rail passages in the tank rail 150 into a plurality of front and rear rows (for example, front and rear rows). Further, the downstream portions of the front and rear rows of ball passages formed in the interior are bifurcated to form front and rear rows of award balls, a ball rental ball passage, and a ball removal ball passage. A payout member (not shown) made of a rotating body for distributing and paying out game balls to any of the passages is rotated in the forward and reverse directions at the branch portion between the winning ball and the ball passage for lending and the ball passage for ball removal. It is arranged to be possible.

[Equipment on the lower rear of the main frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. On the rear side of the front frame 11 of the main body frame 3, on one side (left side in FIG. 4) of the rear lower region of the front frame 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, A launching device unit in which a launching hammer (not shown) for launching a game ball sent to the launching position of the tilted end, a launching motor 192 for differentially launching the launching hammer, and the like are assembled to the mounting substrate 193 and unitized. 194 is installed.

  A power supply board box 196 for receiving the power supply board 195 is mounted at a substantially central portion of the rear lower region of the front frame body 11, and the dispensing control board 197 is received in a state of being superimposed on the rear side of the power supply board box 196. A payout control board box 198 is mounted.

  The payout control board 197 includes a RAM for storing the number of game balls to be paid out, and transmits a control signal for paying out game balls in accordance with a payout signal transmitted from the main control board 510 to a relay circuit board (not shown). Thus, the operation of the payout motor 172 is controlled.

[Configuration of rear cover body]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine 1 from the upper right rear.

  The rear end portions of the display device control board box 117 (see FIG. 9) and the main control board box 132 arranged on the rear surface of the game board 5 project toward the window opening portion opened in the center portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. .

  Between the side wall portion constituting one side wall of the window opening portion of the mechanism mounting body 13 and the one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135 constituting the other end wall, an opaque synthetic resin material is formed into a substantially square box shape. Then, the rear cover body 210 is detachably mounted by a cover hinge mechanism 211.

  The rear cover body 210 is configured integrally with a substantially rectangular rear wall portion 212 and a peripheral wall portion 213 that protrudes forward from the outer peripheral edge of the rear wall portion 212. Of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, the one side wall portion 213 a is respectively viewed from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 214 formed at a total of three locations above and below the rear wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. A hinge body 216 having a hinge pin 215 that is detachably fitted downward is integrally formed.

  Further, of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, the other wall portion 213b has a locking claw that can be elastically engaged with a locking hole formed in one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135. An elastic closing body 217 is integrally formed.

  That is, in the rear cover body 210, the hinge pins 215 of the upper and lower and intermediate hinge bodies 216 are respectively fitted from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 214 of the side wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. In this state, the rear cover body 210 is rotated toward the other side of the mechanism mounting body 13 around the hinge pin 215, and the elastic closing body 217 is inserted into the locking hole on one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135. The rear cover body 210 is held in the closed state on the rear side of the mechanism mounting body 13 by being elastically engaged. Then, the rear cover body 210 covers the entire display device control board box 117 (see FIG. 9) on the rear surface of the game board 5 and a portion extending from the substantially middle portion to the upper end of the main control board box 132 by the rear cover body 210. ing. As a result, the board connector of the main control board 510 exposed to the upper part of the main control board box 132 (mainly a board connector for connecting to the display device control board 116) is hidden from view from behind.

  Further, a portion from the substantially middle portion to the lower end of the main control board box 132 is exposed without being covered by the rear cover body 210. The inspection connector 218 disposed on the main control board 510 is exposed below the main control board box 132, and the inspection connector on the main control board 510 is closed with the rear cover body 210 closed. A board inspection device (not shown) can be connected to the connector 218 for inspection.

  A large number of heat radiation holes 230, 231, 232, and 233 are provided in the rear cover body 210, and internal heat is released from these many heat radiation holes 230, 231, 232, and 233. . In this embodiment, the rear cover body 210 is provided with a large number of slit-like heat radiation holes 230 extending from the peripheral wall portion 213 to the rear wall portion 212, and from the substantially middle height position of the rear wall portion 212 to the upper portion. A large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 231 are penetrated, and a large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 232 and a predetermined number of horizontally elongated rectangular heat radiation holes 233 are penetrated below the rear wall 212. Has been.

  Further, the horizontally elongated rectangular heat radiation holes 233 have a size corresponding to the size and arrangement position of the plurality of parallel seal portions 235 sealed by the seal screws (sealing members) of the main control board box 132. It penetrates the position. As a result, even when the opaque rear cover body 210 is closed, the plurality of parallel sealing portions 235 of the main control board box 132 are exposed so as to be visible at the portion of the heat radiation hole 233. For this reason, even when the rear cover body 210 is closed, the sealing state of the sealing portion 235 of the main control board box 132 can be easily visually confirmed. Further, since the opaque synthetic resin material can be easily used as a synthetic resin material that is recycled compared to the transparent synthetic resin material, the rear cover body 210 can be manufactured at low cost.

  Of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, a predetermined position (two places on the left and right in this embodiment) of the upper wall portion 213c is substantially C-shaped to hold a power cord (not shown) in an appropriately folded state. An elastically deformable cord holder 237 extends toward the rear wall surface of the upper tank rail 150 (the rear wall surface of the rail component 139). A knob for removing the power cord by elastically deforming the cord holder 237 is formed at the tip of the cord holder 237.

  One end of the power cord is detachably connected to the board connector 239 of the distribution board 238, and the power plug at the other end is inserted into a power outlet. As described above, the cord holder 237 is integrally formed on the rear cover body 210 and the power cord is held, so that the power cord hangs and gets caught by foreign objects when the pachinko machine is transported and stored. Problems can be prevented.

[Structure of ball derivatives for lower pan, etc. at rear lower part of body frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 6. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the rear cover body 210 and various control boards are removed from the perspective view of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG.

  A lower dish ball derivative 253 is attached to the other side portion (hinge portion) of the rear lower region of the main body frame 3 in the recessed portion of the rear step portion of the speaker box portion 16. The lower tray ball derivative 253 is used when the game balls paid out to the upper plate 51 through the upper plate connecting path (not shown) from the winning and rental ball passages of the ball dispensing device 170 are full. The game ball on the upper plate communication path is for guiding the game ball to the lower plate 31.

  In this embodiment, a board box 254 that houses the interface board 252 is mounted on the outer surface of the rear wall of the lower plate ball derivative 253. The interface board 252 is interposed between the ball rental machine installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 197, and transmits / receives a signal relating to ball rental between the ball rental machine and the payout control board 197. Electrical connection is possible.

[About the configuration of the game board]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing the configuration of the game board 5 having the game area 37. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the game board 5 from obliquely forward.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the game board 5 has a substantially circular game area forming wall 80 that forms the game area 37. Inside the game area forming wall 80 (on the game area 37 side) and on the left side, a guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 for guiding the game ball to the game area 37 is provided. A game ball launched from the launcher unit 194 (see FIG. 7) is driven toward the game area 37 along the guide rail.

  In the center of the game area 37, a center accessory 300 is arranged. The center accessory 300 has a size that occupies more than two-thirds of the width direction of the game area 37. The center accessory 300 has a substantially rectangular opening 301, and an effect image display device 115 is disposed in the opening 301. The center accessory 300 has a frame-shaped decorative body 370, and the frame-shaped decorative body 370 is provided along the opening edge of the opening 301.

  A first start port 390 that can receive a game ball driven toward the game area 37 is disposed below the center combination 300. Below the first start port 390, a third start port 394 having a pair of movable pieces 396 (the second start port will be described later) is disposed. When the pair of movable pieces 396 are in the closed state, the third starting port 394 is unable to receive the game ball or is difficult to receive, and when the pair of movable pieces 396 is in the open state, It becomes easier to accept a game ball than the one start port 390. In addition, as for a pair of movable piece 396 illustrated in FIG.10, FIG.11 and FIG.12, both an open state and a closed state are represented by the continuous line.

  In the present embodiment, “downward” means the downstream side of the game ball in the downflow direction, and “upward” means the upstream side of the game ball in the downflow direction.

  An opening 372 is formed in the lower frame 370a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 directly above the first start port 390.

  An opening / closing device for production 398 is provided on the upper part of the center accessory 300. The effect opening / closing device 398 includes an effect large winning opening 3981 and an opening / closing door 3982 provided corresponding to the effect large winning opening 3981.

  The stage prize winning opening 3981 is an open area where a game ball can be received. Specifically, among the six directions around the upper side, the lower side, the left side, the right side, the near side and the back side, This is an area in which openings are formed on the front side and the upper side as viewed, and walls are formed on the left side, the right side, the lower side, and the rear side. The opening on the near side from the player is closed by a glass plate attached to the window frame 39. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball received in the large prize winning opening 3981 for performance. On the other hand, the upper opening is configured to be opened and closed by an opening / closing door 3982 described later. Further, the back wall is made of a transparent member that can transmit light, and behind this transparent member is provided an effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 that can emit light by switching between red and green. Yes. That is, the effect opening / closing device status display lamp 651 can be displayed in the effect opening / closing device 398.

  The opening / closing door 3982 is a member for switching the opening on the upper side of the effect winning prize opening 3981 between an open state in which a game ball can be received and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be received or difficult. Specifically, it is a movable piece made up of a rectangular flat plate configured to be able to be taken in and out in a direction substantially orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 5 (that is, the front-rear direction), and the open / close door 3982 is viewed from the player. When the game board 5 protrudes from the board surface to the near side, the upper opening is closed, and when it is retracted to the board surface side of the game board 5 (in this embodiment, the board surface of the game board 5 and the open / close door 3982 are substantially planes. The upper opening opens. As described above, the opening / closing door 3982 is configured to be freely inserted and removed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 5, so that the area of the effect opening / closing device 398 occupying the game area 37 can be saved. it can. In recent years, since the effect image display device 115 has been enlarged in order to enhance the interest of the game related to the effect, it is necessary to efficiently provide each member in the game area 37, and the effect is remarkable. In particular, in this embodiment, since the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided separately from the hit jack game opening / closing device 400 provided conventionally, the area of the effect opening / closing device 398 occupying the game area 37 is reduced. The effect by is tremendous.

  In addition, when the stage prize winning opening 3981 is in the closed state, the game ball that is driven toward the game area 37 and collides with the flat portion of the open / close door 3982 gives an impact to the flat portion of the open / close door 3982. However, in the present embodiment, the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided above the effect image display device 115, so that the effect opening / closing device 398 is temporarily provided below the first start port 390. The impact that the game ball gives to the flat portion of the effect opening / closing device 398 is reduced. This is because the game ball driven toward the game area 37 is accelerated by gravity, and therefore the speed of the game ball when the door 3982 is provided at the upper side collides with the flat portion of the door 3982. Is small.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 3982 is configured to be freely inserted and removed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 5, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the area of the effect opening / closing device 398 occupying the game area 37 If the space can be saved, the crossing direction may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the “front-rear direction” means the front-rear direction when viewed from the player.

  A jackpot gaming opening / closing device is provided between the first start port 390 and the ball discharge port 406, specifically below the third start port 394 and above the ball discharge port 406 (directly above in the present embodiment). 400 is provided. The effect opening / closing device 398 and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 constitute an opening / closing device 397. The jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 includes a jackpot gaming grand prize opening 4001 and an opening / closing door 4002 provided corresponding to the jackpot gaming big prize opening 4001. The big hit game winning prize opening 4001 is an opening capable of receiving a game ball. The open / close door 4002 is used for switching the jackpot game winning prize opening 4001 between a closed state in which a game ball driven into the game area 37 cannot be received and an open state in which the game ball can be received more easily than the closed state. It is a member. It should be noted that when the jackpot game winning prize opening 4001 is in the closed state, it is not necessarily limited to the fact that it is impossible to accept the game ball that is driven toward the game area 37, and it is difficult, preferably extremely difficult. There may be.

  A passing gate 402 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the center accessory 300, and three lower left corners (on the left side of the first start port 390 and the third start port 394) of the center accessory 300. One general winning opening 404 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the “left side” means the left side as viewed from the player.

  The game balls that have not won any of the start openings 390, 392, 394, the production opening / closing device 398, the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, and the general winning opening 404 are most downstream in the flow direction of the game balls. A ball discharge port 406 for discharging behind the board 5 is formed. That is, each of the start ports 390, 392, 394, the effect opening / closing device 398, the jackpot game opening / closing device 400, and the general winning port 404 provided upstream of the ball discharge port 406 in the flow direction of the game ball. The game balls that have not won the prize flow down toward the ball discharge port 406.

  The jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is disposed immediately above the ball discharge port 406. As a result, during the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, game balls that have not won any of the start ports 390, 392, 394, the production opening / closing device 398 and the general winning opening 404 are the jackpot gaming opening / closing device. Since it gathers in the vicinity of 400, it can have a sense of expectation of winning a prize.

  On the lower right of the center object 300, a first special symbol display 84 for displaying a lottery result by a first special symbol lottery means 700, which will be described later, and a second special symbol for displaying a lottery result by a second special symbol lottery means 710. A display 86, a first special symbol hold indicator 88 that displays the number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 700, and a second special symbol hold indicator that displays the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 710. 90 is provided.

  Each of these indicators 84, 86, 88, 90 is constituted by, for example, an LED. Depending on the lighting state of the LED, a lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and a lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 The number of lotteries held by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the number of lotteries held by the second special symbol lottery means 710 are notified.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the “number of lottery holds” means the number of holds for determining whether or not the acquired random number for determining whether or not the winning random number for winning is acquired, However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of determinations may be the number of determination random numbers for which determination is made and the acquisition determination random numbers are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol hold indicator 88 and the second special symbol hold indicator 90 may be the number of lots to be held instead of the lottery hold number. In other words, although it is determined whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is obtained and whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired, the determination result is not displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. , The number of such hold may be displayed.

  In the vicinity of the lower frame 370 a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370, the center accessory 300 is downstream of the first shelf (hereinafter referred to as “first stage 330”) and the first stage 330 in the flow direction of the game ball. And a second shelf (hereinafter referred to as “second stage 350”) arranged on the side. The position where the second stage 350 is disposed is on the opposite side of the effect image display device 115 with respect to the first stage 330 (that is, the front (player) side). A step is formed between the first stage 330 and the second stage 350.

  A first stage guiding path for guiding a flowing game ball to the first stage 330 in the vicinity of the substantially vertical center of the left frame 370 b of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 (that is, the side of the frame-shaped decorative body 370). (Hereinafter referred to as "first warp 316") is provided with a first warp inlet 306 that can be received.

  A second warp inlet 308 that can be received in a second stage guide path (hereinafter referred to as “second warp 318”) is provided below the first warp inlet 306 in parallel with the first warp inlet 306. Yes.

  Below the first warp inlet 306 and the second warp inlet 308, a first warp guide piece (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the first warp inlet 306 and the game ball to the second warp inlet 308, respectively. A second warp guide piece 310 is provided. The second warp guide piece 310 protrudes from the frame-shaped decorative body 370 toward the left (that is, from the center accessory 300 to the game area 37). Thereby, the second warp inlet 308 is easier to guide the game ball than the first warp inlet 306. Therefore, even when the game ball is not guided to the first warp entrance 306, the expectation that is accepted by the second warp entrance 308 is increased, and the interest is enhanced.

  The first stage 330 has a curved surface formed in a wave shape from the first warp outlet side end 336 to the first warp opposite outlet side end 338. Specifically, a mountain portion 332 that swells upward is formed at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the first stage 330, and a valley portion continuously connected to the mountain portion 332 is formed on the left and right sides of the mountain portion 332. 334 is formed.

  In addition, the height of the peak portion 332 is lower than the first warp outlet side end 336 and the first warp counter-exit side end 338. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the first warp outlet 312 can get over the mountain portion 332 and reciprocate between the first warp outlet side end 336 and the first warp counter-exit side end 338. Can move.

  A hill portion 352 is formed at a substantially central portion of the second stage 350. The elevated part 352 is located in front of the peak part 332 of the first stage 330. The second stage 350 has a curved portion 354 having a curved surface formed from the second warp outlet side end portion 356 to the elevated portion 352 in addition to the elevated portion 352. Moreover, it has the curved part 354 in which the curved surface was formed from the 2nd warp opposite exit side edge part 358 to the high platform part 352. FIG. These curved portions 354 are curved below the hill portion 352.

  The height of the hill portion 352 is lower than the second warp outlet side end 356 and the second warp counter-exit side end 358. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the second warp outlet 314 can get over the hill part 352 and reciprocate between the second warp outlet side end part 356 and the second warp counter-exit side end part 358. Can roll.

  The game balls received at the first warp inlet 306 and the second warp inlet 308 are discharged from the first warp outlet 312 and the second warp outlet 314, respectively, and are guided to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350.

  Note that the direction in which the game ball flows down in the first warp 316 and the direction in which the game ball rolls in the first stage 330 are substantially collinear, the game ball that has flowed down the first warp 316 has little loss of kinetic energy. . That is, if the game ball that has flowed down the first warp 316 changes its traveling direction, kinetic energy is lost. Accordingly, the game ball that has flowed down the first warp 316 rolls on the first stage 330 vigorously. Similarly, since the flow direction of the game ball in the second warp 318 and the rolling direction of the game ball in the second stage 350 are substantially on the same line, the game ball flowing down the second warp 318 also has a loss of kinetic energy. Few. As a result, both the game ball guided to the first stage 330 and the game ball guided to the second stage 350 roll on the first stage 330 and the second stage 350 vigorously, and each stage 330 , 350, the game balls play in each stage 330, 350, and the interest is enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball is not guided to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350 from the right side of the center accessory 300. That is, since the game balls are guided only from the left side of the center accessory 300 to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350, the game balls rolling on the first stage 330 and the second stage 350 are viewed from opposite directions. Rolling is not inhibited by the guided game ball. As a result, the time spent on each stage 330, 350 becomes longer, and as a result, the game balls play in each stage 330, 350, and the interest is enhanced.

  In the vicinity of the lower frame 370 a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370, and between the effect image display device 115 and the first stage 330, a center illumination unit 302 adjacent to the effect image display device 115 is formed. A shelf-like curved surface is formed in the center electrical decoration portion 302 along the width direction of the center accessory 300, and a plurality of center decoration lamps 304 are arranged on the curved surface.

  A second start port 392 that can receive a game ball is formed at a position that is substantially in the center in the left-right direction of the center illumination unit 302 and that corresponds to the mountain portion 332 of the first stage 330. That is, the second start port 392 is provided not in the second stage 350 side, which is the flow direction of the game ball, but in the opposite direction. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392. This is because the second stage 350 is formed below the first stage 330 and a stage partition wall 364 described later is provided between the first stage 330 and the second stage 350.

  In addition, a second start port guiding groove 340 for guiding a game ball to the second start port 392 is formed in the peak portion 332 of the first stage 330. The second starting port guiding groove 340 is inclined downward from the peak portion 332 to the second starting port 392, so that the game ball is guided to the second starting port 392. Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the first stage 330 does not have the momentum to roll in the vicinity of the mountain portion 332, it is easily guided to the second start port 392 by the second start port guide groove 340.

  The game ball that has won the second starting port 392 is discharged to the back of the game board 5 through a discharge path (not shown) communicating with the back of the game board 5.

  A second stage guide groove 342 for guiding a game ball to the second stage 350 is formed in the valley portion 334 of the first stage 330. The second stage guide groove 342 is inclined downward from the trough 334 to the second stage 350, whereby the game ball is guided to the second stage 350. Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the first stage 330 does not have the momentum to climb over the mountain portion 332, the second stage guide groove 342 makes it easy to be guided to the second stage 350. The game ball that has lost its momentum to reciprocate between the first warp outlet side end 336 and the first warp counter-exit side end 338 wins the third starting port 394 from the mountain portion 332. The possibility of being guided from the valley 334 to the second stage 350 is much higher than the possibility.

  Between the first stage 330 and the second stage 350, a thin plate-like stage partition wall 364 for partitioning the stages 330 and 350 is provided. The stage partition wall 364 is disposed so as to protrude upward from the surface on the first stage 330, so that a game ball rolling on the first stage 330 does not flow down to the second stage 350. It has become. However, a communication portion 366 that connects the first stage 330 (specifically, the valley portion 334) and the second stage 350 is formed at a position corresponding to the valley portion 334 of the first stage 330 of the stage partition wall 364. ing. The game balls that have lost the momentum to roll to the left and right near the communication portion 366 flow down from the first stage 330 to the second stage 350 through the communication portion 366.

  A first start port guide path 374 is provided at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the second stage 350 (that is, a portion corresponding to the mountain portion 332 of the first stage 330) and a position corresponding to the hill portion 352. Thus, a first start port guide port 368 communicating with an opening 372 formed in the lower frame 370a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 is formed. In other words, the first start port guide port 368 is provided not in the flow-down direction side of the game ball but in the opposite direction. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize that the game ball is received by the first start port guide port 368.

  The game ball guided to the first start port guide port 368 is discharged from the opening 372 onto the game board 5 through the first start port guide path 374. Here, since the first start port guide path 374 is formed so as to guide the game ball to a position directly above the first start port 390, the first start port guide path 374 is guided to the first start port guide path 374 and discharged to the game board 5 surface side. The expectation that the played game ball wins the first start opening 390 becomes very large. However, a nail is disposed directly above the first start opening 390, and the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 390 may be hindered by this nail. Therefore, the probability that the game ball discharged from the opening 372 onto the game board 5 through the first start port guiding path 374 wins the first start port 390 is about one fourth to three fourths. Become.

  The substantially central portion of the hill portion 352 in the left-right direction corresponds to the position of the first start port guide port 368 and is inclined downward from both ends of the hill portion 352 to the substantially central portion. In addition, a front inclined groove 360 for guiding a game ball to a third shelf (hereinafter referred to as “third stage 376”) to be described later is formed at a substantially central portion of the hill portion 352. In addition, a first start port guide port guide groove 362 for guiding the game ball to the first start port guide port 368 is further formed inside the front inclined groove 360. That is, a front inclined groove 360 that is inclined downward from the rear to the front is formed in a substantially central portion of the hill portion 352, and the inside of the front inclined groove 360 is further inclined downward from the front to the rear. One start port guide opening guide groove 362 is formed. Thereby, the game ball that has lost the momentum to roll to the left and right in the vicinity of the front inclined groove 360 is guided to the first starting port guiding port 368 along the first starting port guiding port guiding groove 362, and the forward inclined groove 360 may flow down to the third stage 376.

  Further, a third stage 376 having a curved surface so as to draw an arc in the left-right direction is formed on the lower frame 370a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370. The game ball can roll on the third stage 376 in the left-right direction. A front guide groove 378 that is inclined downward from the rear to the front is formed in a substantially central portion of the third stage 376 in the left-right direction. The game ball that has lost the momentum to roll from side to side in the vicinity of the front guide groove 378 flows down on the game board 5 along the front guide groove 378.

  As described above, since the first start port guide opening guide groove 362 is formed in the substantially central portion of the hill portion 352, the expectation that the game ball is guided to the first start port guide port 368 is from the peak portion 332. It becomes extremely higher than the expectation to win the 2 start opening 392. In addition, only the game balls received from the first warp inlet 306 into the center accessory 300 can be won at the second start opening 392, while the first warp inlet 306 or the second warp can be won at the first start opening 390. In addition to the game balls received from the entrance 308 in the center combination 300, the game balls flowing down the left side of the center combination 300 may be guided by the nail and win the first starting port 390. Thus, the probability that a game ball wins the first start port 390 is higher than the probability that the game ball wins the second start port 392.

  FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing the game board 5 obliquely from the front, and is a perspective view in which the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are made visible by removing the decorative cover. As shown in FIG. 12, the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are formed so as to be partitioned from each other. That is, a game ball taken in from the first warp inlet 306 flows down only the first warp 316, and a game ball taken in from the second warp inlet 308 flows down only the second warp 318. Thereby, the game ball taken in from the first warp inlet 306 and the game ball taken in from the second warp inlet 308 are guided to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350, respectively, without interfering with each other.

  Further, each of the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 is made of a transparent member so that a game ball flowing down inside can be visually recognized. Thereby, the game ball received from the 1st warp entrance 306 or the 2nd warp entrance 308 can be visually recognized. Since the player is often attracted to the center character 300 and the effect image display device 115, the player often misses that the game ball has been received at the first warp entrance 306 or the second warp entrance 308. As a result, interest was reduced. Therefore, by using the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 as transparent members, the first warp even if it is missed that the game ball has been received at the first warp inlet 306 or the second warp inlet 308. Since the game balls flowing down 316 and the second warp 318 can be visually recognized, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are disposed along the opening 301 of the center accessory 300 adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction. Specifically, the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are adjacent to each other and provided along the opening 301 of the center accessory 300 so that the second warp 318 is on the front side. Thereby, even if it is a narrow space, both can be arranged efficiently.

  FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing a configuration around the first warp 316 and the second warp 318. As shown in FIG. 13, an effect light source 380 is arranged behind the first warp 316 and the second warp 318. The light source 380 includes a base 382 and a plurality of LEDs 384, and the plurality of LEDs 384 are arranged on the base 382. The light source 380 (base 382 and LED 384), the decorative cover 386, and the light transmitting member 388 constitute an electric decoration member 379.

  The light emitted from the light source 380 enters the light transmission member 388, passes through the light transmission member 388 along the plane portion 3881, and is guided to the front of the game board 5. The light transmitting member 388 is a curved plate-like member and is made of a resin such as a transparent plastic. The light transmitting member 388 includes a flat portion 3881 and an end portion 3882 intersecting with the flat portion 3881. The light transmitting member 388 is disposed so that the end portion 3882 is on the front side (player side).

  The first warp 316, the second warp 318, and the light transmission member 388 are covered with a colored non-transparent decorative cover 386. Since the light transmitted through the light transmitting member 388 is guided to the decorative cover 386, the front portion of the decorative cover 386 emits light. As described above, the light transmission member 388 can guide the light emitted from the light source 380 forward to emit light linearly. In addition, since the light transmitting member 388 can guide light forward by the length in the width direction of the plane portion 3881, the degree of freedom in the position where the light source 380 is disposed is increased.

  In addition, since the decorative cover 386 is colored, it is difficult to visually recognize the first warp 316 and the second warp 318. Accordingly, the first warp visual recognition hole 3861 and the second warp so that the game ball flowing down the second warp 318 can be seen on the front surface of the decorative cover 386 so that the game ball flowing down the first warp 316 can be seen. A viewing hole 3862 is formed. Thereby, while being able to perform the effect by the colored light, the game balls flowing down the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 can be visually recognized, and the interest is enhanced.

  FIG. 14 is a view showing the positional relationship between the light transmission member 388 and the first warp 316 and the second warp 318. As shown in FIG. 14, the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are attached along the flat portion 3881 of the light transmission member 388. Here, since the light emitted from the light source 380 is guided forward from the end portion 3882 of the light transmitting member 388, the path through which the game ball flows can be easily grasped by the light emitted from the light source 380.

  In addition, since the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are disposed adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction, the first light warp 316 and the second warp 318 are not provided with the light source 380 and the light transmission member 388, respectively. The game balls flowing down each of the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 can be grasped.

  Further, since the light transmitted through the light transmitting member 388 is emitted from the end portion 3882, the light can be emitted linearly. Thereby, it is possible to emit light even in a narrow place such as a place along the periphery of the center accessory 300, and a gorgeous effect can be executed. Furthermore, it is possible to emit light in a frame shape as in the case where light is emitted along the opening 301 of the center accessory 300.

  Further, the flat portion 3881 is formed in a bowl shape at the end portion 3882 of the light transmitting member 388 when viewed from the front view direction. Thereby, the light transmitted through the plane portion 3881 is not guided linearly forward, but is dispersed in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the end portion 3882, so that the light emitting area becomes larger and looks more gorgeous. Enhanced.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect accessory 420 that is arranged in the game area 37 and can perform an effect using one game ball. FIG. 15 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 5 including the effect bonus 420.

  The stage effect 420 is disposed inside the center role 300 and adjacent to the right frame 370c of the frame-shaped decorative body 370, and uses a game ball received from the stage opening / closing device 398. Produce.

  The effect accessory 420 has a cylindrical accessory container 422, and a figure 424 is accommodated in the accessory container 422 as shown in FIG. The accessory container 422 is formed of a transparent member that allows a part of the circumferential direction to visually recognize the internal figure 424, and another part that is different from the part of the circumferential direction holds the internal figure 424. It is composed of an opaque member that cannot be visually recognized. However, an opening may be formed instead of the transparent member. If the figure 424 accommodated in the inside can be visually recognized, the aspect will not be limited.

  In this specification, the side on which the figure 424 can be visually recognized is referred to as an effect side area, and the side on which the figure 424 cannot be viewed is referred to as a decoration side area.

  The accessory storage body 422 is configured to be rotatable with respect to the game board 5 with the center extending in the longitudinal direction (that is, the center line of the cross section crossing the longitudinal direction of the accessory storage body 422) as the rotation center. Therefore, depending on the rotation position, the player may or may not be able to see the figure 424. That is, the figure 424 cannot be viewed when the opaque member is in front (player side) (see FIG. 10), and the figure 424 is visible when the transparent portion is in front (see FIG. 15). .

  Note that the phrase “freely rotatable with respect to the game board 5” does not mean that it is attached to the game board 5, but whether it is attached to the game board 5 or not. Can be freely rotated.

  When the figure 424 cannot be visually recognized, the character “Utahime” can be visually recognized on the front surface of the accessory container 422. This character is composed of a transparent member capable of transmitting light. Further, a light source such as an LED is disposed behind the character. When light is emitted from the light source toward the front of the game board 5, the “diva legend (decorative character)” is turned on. And the effect | action actor 420 can also be used as a decoration member by making the lighting aspect of a light source into various aspects.

  Therefore, the stage effect 420 functions as the stage role 420 when the figure 424 can be visually recognized, and functions as a decorative member when the figure 424 cannot be viewed (that is, when the decorative characters can be visually recognized). The area 5 can be used effectively, and the player can be surprised by rotating the accessory container 422, so that interest is enhanced.

  FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing the game board base 480 attached to the rear of the game board 5 from the front upper front. FIG. 17A is an enlarged front view of the game board 5. FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17B, the game ball received from the effect opening / closing device 398 is directed toward the effect accessory 420 between the effect accessory 420 and the effect opening / closing device 398. An accessory guiding path 440 for guiding is provided.

  Further, the accessory guide path 440 is inclined downward from the effect opening / closing device 398 toward the effect accessory 420 (see FIG. 16). Thereby, the game ball received by the effect opening / closing device 398 rolls on the accessory guide path 440 toward the effect accessory 420. In addition, the accessory guide path 440 is made of a transparent resin member, whereby the game ball rolling on the accessory guide path 440 can be visually recognized.

  The game ball received from the effect opening / closing device 398 is discharged behind the game ball and the game board 5 guided to the effect role 420 by the distribution mechanism 450 provided above the effect role 420. Sorted into game balls.

  FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the effect opening / closing device 398, the accessory guide path 440, the distribution mechanism 450, and the effect accessory 420 as viewed from the upper left. FIGS. 19 to 21 are plan views of the accessory guiding path 440, the distribution mechanism 450, and the effect accessory 420, and show the manner in which game balls are distributed by the distribution mechanism 450.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 21, the distribution mechanism 450 includes a solenoid 452 having a plunger 4521 that expands and contracts (moves) in the X direction and the Y direction shown in FIG. 18, and an effect opening / closing device 398 (see FIG. 18). A game ball holding member 454 that can hold only one game ball received from the above, a connection member 456 that connects the plunger 4521 and the game ball holding member 454, and a pin 458 that supports the connection member 456. ing.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the plunger 4521 of the solenoid 452 is located on the X direction side in the normal state (that is, the demagnetized state). The game ball that has rolled on the accessory guide path 440 toward the distribution mechanism 450 is held by the game ball holding member 454.

  As shown in FIG. 20, when one game ball is held by the game ball holding member 454, the game ball that subsequently rolls on the accessory guiding path 440 cannot be held by the game ball holding member 454. The game board 5 is discharged to the rear side (Y direction side in the figure).

  As shown in FIG. 21, when the solenoid 452 is excited, the plunger moves in the Y direction. At this time, the connecting member 456 rotates counterclockwise (α direction in the figure) with the pin 458 as a fulcrum. The game ball holding member 454 rotates counterclockwise as the connecting member 456 rotates counterclockwise. A drop opening 4221 through which a game ball can be dropped is formed on the upper surface of the accessory storage body 422 of the effect accessory 420. When the solenoid 452 is excited and the game ball holding member 454 rotates counterclockwise with the connecting member 456 as a fulcrum, the game ball held by the game ball holding member 454 enters the accessory storage body 422 from the drop port 4221. Fall.

  If the solenoid 452 is in a demagnetized state, the game ball held by the game ball holding member 454 is held at a position shifted from the drop opening 4221. Therefore, the game ball held by the game ball holding member 454 is used as an accessory. It does not fall into the container 422.

  In this way, even if there are a plurality of game balls won in the effect opening / closing device 398, only one game ball is guided into the effect accessory 420 by the distribution mechanism 450. As a result, it is possible for the effect item 420 to produce an effect using one game ball.

  FIG. 22 is a front view showing the internal configuration of the accessory container 422 of the effect accessory 420. As shown in FIG. 22, a figure 424 that produces an effect using a game ball is arranged inside the accessory container 422.

  In addition to the figure 424, a first effect rod 426 and a second effect rod 428 are provided inside the accessory container 422 so that the game ball can roll. Each of the first effect rod 426 and the second effect rod 428 is made of a transparent member so that the manner in which the game ball rolls can be visually recognized.

  The figure 424 is arranged in such a manner that the one hand 4241 is pushed forward. The support shaft 430 is supported on the figure 424 directly above the one hand 4241. The support shaft 430 is an axis whose longitudinal direction is the front-rear direction. That is, the one hand 4241 and the support shaft 430 are substantially parallel. The first performance rod 426 is fixed to the one hand 4241 so as to be supported by the one hand 4241 of the figure 424 and is supported by the support shaft 430.

  The support shaft 430 is configured integrally with the one hand 4241 and the first performance rod 426 of the figure 424, and is configured to be rotatable within a predetermined angle range.

  A second effect rod 428 is disposed below the first effect rod 426. The second performance rod 428 is inclined from one end (right end 4281 in the present embodiment) to the other end (left end 4282 in the present embodiment).

  The first performance port 432 is communicated with the second effect rod 428 below the support shaft 430 and on the right end side below the support shaft 430 and on the left end side. A second effect 樋 induction port 434 is formed. In other words, the second performance 樋 guidance port 434 can guide the game ball on the first performance 樋 426 to the second performance port 436 by rolling on the second performance 樋 428. When the support shaft 430 rotates in the counterclockwise direction to the rotation limit, the left end 4262 of the first performance rod 426 is positioned above the first performance exit 432. On the other hand, when the support shaft 430 rotates in the clockwise direction to the rotation limit, the right end 4261 of the first effect rod 426 is positioned above the second effect rod guide port 434.

  In addition, a second performance exit 432 is formed immediately below the left end 4282 of the second performance rod 428. That is, the first performance port 432 and the second performance port 436 are formed side by side.

  Here, the first performance port 432 is configured in blue, and the second performance hall guide port 434 and the second performance port 436 are configured in red. Thereby, since the 2nd stage exit 436 and the 2nd stage 樋 guidance opening 434 are the same color, while performing the stage which distributes the game ball which rolls on the 1st stage bowl 426 to the right and left, the stage image display device 115 makes it possible to perform an effect of notifying which one of the first performance exit 432 and the second performance exit 436 is a winning game ball, and the interest is enhanced.

[Control structure of main board and peripheral board]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the main board 500. FIG. 24 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and is a diagram mainly showing the configuration around the peripheral substrate 600. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  Control of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is broadly divided into a group of main boards 500 (shown in FIG. 23) and a group of peripheral boards 600 (shown in FIG. 24). The group of main boards 500 controls game operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral boards 600 is directing actions (issued decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display and decorative body). Control).

  As shown in FIG. 23, the main board 500 includes a main control board 510 and a payout control board 520. The main control board 510 includes a CPU 511 as a central processing unit, a ROM 512 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 513 as a readable / writable memory.

  The CPU 511 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 512, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral board 600 or the payout control board 520.

  The RAM 513 temporarily stores information such as various data generated in various processes executed by the main control board 510 and input signals.

  The main board 500 is connected to the power supply board 195 via the power supply relay terminal plate 199 so that the operation power is supplied from the power supply board 195.

  The input interface of the main control board 510 includes a first start port sensor 580 that detects a winning state at the first start port 390, a second start port sensor 582 that detects a winning state at the second start port 392, and a second start port sensor 582. A third start port sensor 584 for detecting a winning state at the 3 start port 394 and an all winning port winning number detection sensor 586 for counting the number of winnings for all the winning ports are connected.

  In addition, the input interface of the main control board 510 indicates that the game ball has won the gate sensor 560 for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 402 and the general winning opening 404 through the panel relay terminal board 550. A general winning opening sensor 562 to be detected is connected.

  Furthermore, an effect opening / closing device count sensor 570 is connected to the input interface of the main control board 510 via an effect opening / closing device relay terminal plate 552 connected to the panel relay terminal plate 550 and connected to the panel relay terminal plate 550. The jackpot gaming switchgear count sensor 576 is connected via the jackpot gaming switchgear relay terminal plate 554.

  Detection signals from the sensors are input to the main control board 510. Also connected to the input interface of the main control board 510 are an inner frame opening switch 536 for detecting the opening state of the front frame body 11 and a door opening switch 538 for detecting the opening state of the front frame 4.

  On the other hand, a normal symbol / special symbol display board 568 is connected to the output interface of the panel relay terminal board 550 via a symbol limiting resistor board 566. From the main control board 510, the normal symbol display 82, first symbol A drive signal can be output to the special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86.

  In addition, an output opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 578 for driving the opening / closing door 3982 of the effect opening / closing device 398 is connected to the output interface of the effect opening / closing device relay terminal board 552, and these are driven from the main control board 510. A signal is output.

  Further, the output interface of the jackpot game opening / closing device relay terminal plate 554 drives the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 574 that drives the pair of movable pieces 396 of the third start port 394 and the door 4002 of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400. A jackpot gaming opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 572 is connected, and these drive signals are output from the main control board 510.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 520 includes a CPU 522 as a central processing unit, a ROM 524 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 526 as a readable / writable memory.

  The payout control board 520 processes the command signal input from the main control board 510 and outputs a drive signal to the ball payout device 170 and the launch motor 192 connected to the launch control board 532. Thereby, the ball payout device 170 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the firing motor 192 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

  Note that bi-directional communication is performed between the main control board 510 and the payout control board 520 via respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main control board 510 transmits a prize ball command, it responds to this. An ACK signal is returned from the payout control board 520 to the main control board 510.

  The payout control board 520 is also connected with a lower pan full switch 530 for detecting that the game balls stored in the lower plate 31 are full. “Please remove from the dish 31” is notified.

  In addition, an external terminal board 534 is connected to the main control board 510 and the payout control board 520, and the winning statuses of the start ports 390, 392, 394 and the opening / closing devices 398, 400, normal symbols / special symbols are displayed. Various information such as the game state based on the fluctuating state and the lottery result is output to a hall computer or the like provided in the game facility.

  On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 600 includes a peripheral control substrate 610 and a display device control substrate 116 as shown in FIG. Note that only one-way communication is performed between the input / output interface and the input interface between the main control board 510 and the peripheral control board 610, and the main control board 510 and the peripheral control board 610. The command is sent to, but the reverse is not done. Also, power for operation is supplied from the power supply board 195 to the peripheral board 600 via the power supply relay terminal plate 199.

  The peripheral control board 610 also includes electronic components such as a CPU 611, ROM 612, and RAM 613, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 610 is provided with a ROM 619 that stores a sound source that is the basis of voice and music, and a sound source IC 618 that outputs the sound and music according to the production content based on the sound source stored in the ROM 619. It has been.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 610 and the display device control board 116 with each input / output interface.

  On the other hand, a liquid crystal display (LCD) as an effect image display device 115 is connected to the display device control board 116, and the display device control board 116 processes a command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 610. Then, a drive signal is output to the effect image display device 115. More specifically, the display device control board 116 includes a CPU 632, a RAM 634, a ROM 636, a VDP 638, and an image ROM 639.

  The CPU 632 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 610 via the input / output interface and performs arithmetic processing based on the command to control the VDP 638. The RAM 634 provides a work area for the CPU 632 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 636 holds a program for the CPU 632 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 638 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect image display device 115. A register is provided in the VDP 638, and can hold the operation mode of the VDP 638, setting information of various display functions, and the like. Then, the CPU 632 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode in the effect image display device 115 can be changed variously. As a result, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 (determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704) or the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 (the second special symbol) received by the command receiving means 750 described later. It is possible to derive and display the determination result by the symbol appropriateness determination means 714 and display a predetermined effect image. The image ROM 639 is a non-volatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display patterns, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  In addition, a lamp driving board 650 and a frame decoration relay terminal board 640 are connected to the peripheral control board 610. Further, a center decoration driving unit relay terminal plate 662 is connected to the lamp driving substrate 650 as a relay terminal plate. Further, a rotating unit lower LED board 664 is connected to the center decoration driving unit relay terminal plate 662.

  In the input interface of the rotating unit lower LED board 664, the game ball used for the production (that is, the game ball that has rolled the first production pole 426) is either the first performance outlet 432 or the second performance outlet 432. A ball sorter motor sensor 666 is connected to detect whether the ball is accepted. Also connected to the output interface of the rotating unit lower LED board 664 are a ball sorting motor 668 that repeatedly rotates the support shaft 430 clockwise and counterclockwise, and a rotating unit LED board 670 in which LEDs are arranged as electrical decorations. Has been.

  Further, the output interface of the lamp driving board 650 includes a panel decoration lamp 652, a center decoration lamp 304, a rotation motor 658 for rotating the effect accessory 420, and a rotation unit for detecting the rotation position of the effect accessory 420. A motor sensor 660 is connected. Thereby, the lamp drive board 650 can switch the lighting state of each of these lamps, and can detect the rotation operation and the rotation position of the effect accessory 420. Further, a discharge port detection sensor 654 for detecting a game ball discharged to the rear side of the game board 5 is connected to the input interface of the lamp driving board 650.

  The frame decoration relay terminal board 640 connected to the peripheral control board 610 is connected to the speakers 18 and 57 connected to the front frame 4, the effect selection switch 35, the frame decoration lamp 642, and the like. In 610, the effect mode output to the effect image display device 115 is switched based on the operation state of the effect selection switch 35, and a drive signal is output to the speakers 18 and 57 and the frame decoration lamp 642.

[Functional configuration of main control board and peripheral control board]
This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a functional block diagram schematically showing a functional configuration of the peripheral control board 610 in the main control board 510 and the peripheral board 600.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the main control board 510 includes a first special symbol lottery means 700, a first special symbol display control means 502, a first special symbol hold display control means 732, and a first special symbol hold counter 703. Second special symbol lottery means 710, second special symbol display control means 504, second special symbol hold display control means 730, second special symbol hold counter 713, hold order storage means 740, normal symbol Lottery means 720, jackpot game execution means 515, small hit game execution means 514, opening / closing operation control means 738, probability variation game execution means 734, normal symbol lottery means 720, normal symbol display control means 516, normal Symbol hold display control means 518, normal symbol hold counter 723, time-short game execution means 736, third start opening / closing control means 728, command transmitter And a 746.

  The first special symbol lottery means 700 extracts random numbers by the first special symbol determination random number extracting means 702 when a game ball wins the first starting opening 390 and is detected by the first starting opening sensor 580. The extracted random numbers are held up to a first predetermined number (for example, 4) by the hold order storage means 740. When the hold by the hold order storage unit 740 is released, the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 704 determines whether or not the long win, short win or small win is won. The determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 is a normal symbol normal time determination table stored in the ROM 512 and the random number value obtained by the first special symbol determination random number extraction means 702 in the normal gaming state. 706, and in the probability variation gaming state, based on the random number value obtained by the first special symbol per-determination random number extraction means 702 and the special symbol probability variation per-time determination table 708 stored in the ROM 512. Done.

  In this embodiment, “long hit” is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is executed by the jackpot game execution means 515 for 15 rounds, and “short hit” is opened / closed by the jackpot game execution means 515. A game in which the opening / closing operation of the device 397 is executed for two rounds. The “small hit” is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is executed twice by the small hit game execution means 514. Note that the operation mode of the opening / closing device 397 is the same for the short win and the small hit, but when the short win is won, the probability changing function is operated by the probability changing game executing means 734 (that is, the probability changing game state is changed). However, the probability variation function does not work when winning a small hit.

  By the way, when the winning per winning is won, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is continuously executed for 15 rounds, whereby a long winning game in which a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out is performed. In addition, when winning a short win, a short win game is performed in which the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is continuously executed for two rounds. After the short hit game ends, a probability change game state by the probability change game execution means 734 occurs.

  The second special symbol lottery means 710 receives the second special symbol when the game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 and is detected by the second starting port sensor 582 or the third starting port sensor 584. A random number is extracted by the hit determination random number extraction means 712. The extracted random number is held by the second special symbol holding counter 713 up to a second predetermined number (for example, four). Then, when the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is released, it is determined by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 whether or not the long win, short win or small win is won. The determination by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a normal symbol normal time determination table stored in the ROM 512 and the random number value obtained by the second special symbol determination random number extraction means 712 in the normal gaming state. 706, and in the case of the probability variation gaming state, based on the random number value obtained by the second special symbol per-determination random number extraction means 712 and the special symbol probability variation per-time determination table 708 stored in the ROM 512. Done.

  The order in which the game balls are detected by the first start port sensor 580, the second start port sensor 582, and the third start port sensor 584 is stored in the special symbol random number storage area 5131, which will be described later, by the holding order storage means 740. Then, the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 perform lottery one by one based on the order stored in the special symbol random number storage area 5131. That is, based on the order stored in the special symbol random number storage area 5131, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is determined to win the long win, the short win or the small win. It is determined one by one. In addition, the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 is the first special symbol hold counter 703 or the second special symbol when a predetermined release condition is established, for example, a variation condition is established. This is done by releasing the hold by the hold counter 713.

  The determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 704 is displayed on the first special symbol display 84 by the first special symbol display control unit 502. The number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is displayed on the first special symbol hold display 88 by the first special symbol hold display control means 732.

  The determination result by the second special symbol determination unit 714 is displayed on the second special symbol display 86 by the second special symbol display control unit 504. Further, the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is displayed on the second special symbol hold display 90 by the second special symbol hold display control means 730.

  The jackpot game execution means 515 and the jackpot game execution means 514 execute the jackpot game or the jackpot game based on the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. Specifically, when it is determined that the long win is won, the long hit game is executed by the jackpot game execution means 515, and when it is determined that the short win is won, the short hit game is executed by the big hit game execution means 515. When it is determined that the small hit is won, the small hit game executing means 514 executes the small hit game. In the present embodiment, “long win and short win” are collectively referred to as “big hit”, and “long win game and short win game” are collectively referred to as “big hit game”.

  In the present embodiment, the long hit game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 and the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 are performed over a total of 15 rounds. Specifically, after the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 738 for two rounds, the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is continued by the opening / closing operation control means 738 for 12 rounds, and is continuously performed. This is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed again for one round by the opening / closing operation control means 738. The short hit game is a game in which only the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 738 for two rounds, and the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is not performed. The small hit game is a game in which only the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed twice by the opening / closing operation control means 738.

  As described above, when the long hit game is executed, the number of opening / closing operations of the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is executed more than the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398, and the short hit game and the small hit game are executed. The number of opening / closing operations of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed more than the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400.

  The opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed by operating the effect opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 578 by the opening / closing operation control means 738, and the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 738. This is done by operating a jackpot game opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 572.

  Specifically, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a long win, the opening / closing operation control means 738 performs the opening / closing device for effects. The opening / closing solenoid 578 is operated to open / close the opening / closing door 3982 of the effect opening / closing device 398. From the 3rd round to the 14th round, the opening / closing operation control means 738 operates the jackpot gaming opening / closing solenoid 572 to open / close the door opening / closing door 4002 of the jackpot gaming opening / closing apparatus 400. Further, for only 15 rounds, the opening / closing operation opening / closing solenoid 578 is operated by the opening / closing operation control means 738 to open / close the opening / closing door 3982 of the effect opening / closing device 398. On the other hand, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is short hit, the opening / closing operation control means 738 activates the effect opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 578, The operation of opening and closing the opening / closing door 3982 of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed only for two rounds.

  When a game ball wins the effect opening / closing device 398 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, the number of winning balls is counted by the effect opening / closing device count sensor 570 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device count sensor 576. In addition, when a game ball wins the effect opening / closing device 398 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, the winning game ball is detected by the effect opening / closing device count sensor 570 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device count sensor 576. In response, a game ball is paid out as a prize ball by the ball payout device 170.

  If the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a small hit, the opening / closing operation control means 738 causes the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid for performance to be played. The operation of opening and closing the opening / closing door 4002 of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 by operating 578 is performed twice.

  In the present embodiment, opening and closing of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed depending on whether the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is short win or small win. The operation mode is the same. However, in the case of short wins, the game state after the short win game ends becomes a so-called “probability game state” in which the probability of winning a big win is high, but in the case of a small win, the small hit game has ended. The game state remains a normal game state that is not a game state of any one of the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, when the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 3982 is performed two rounds or twice, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the winning is a short hit or a small hit, but thereafter, the first special symbol lottery is performed. The probability of winning the jackpot varies depending on the means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710. Thereby, the player cannot discriminate whether the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state or the normal gaming state, and the interest is enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing operation processing of the effect opening / closing device 398 (specifically, the effect opening / closing device) when the long hit game is executed, when the short hit game is executed, and when the small hit game is executed The number of open / close operations 398) is shared. Thereby, the data amount of ROM 512 of main control board 510 can be reduced. In particular, when the short hit game is executed and when the small hit game is executed, the opening / closing time of the effect opening / closing device 398 is also shared, so that the tables of the short hit game and the small hit game are shared. As a result, the data amount of the ROM 512 can be reduced.

  Here, “round” means that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses and a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) of game balls wins when a long winning game and a short winning game are executed. It means a unit in which the opening / closing device for effect 398 or the opening / closing device for jackpot game 400 is opened / closed by satisfying any of the conditions. Therefore, the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 when the small hit game is being executed is not referred to as “round”. In the present embodiment, the opening time of the effect opening / closing device 398 per round in the short hit game is much longer than the opening time of the effect opening / closing device 398 and the big hit game opening / closing device 400 per round in the long hit game. It is a short time. Note that the opening time of the effect opening / closing device 398 per time in the small hit game is substantially the same as the opening time of the effect opening / closing device 398 per round in the short hit game.

  The probability variation game execution means 734 is a probability variation game that increases the probability of winning the jackpot in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 in the game after the long hit game or the short hit game is executed. Execute. Specifically, the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol validity determination unit 704 and the second special symbol validity determination unit 714 is performed based on the special symbol probability change time determination table 708, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, “probability change game” means that the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 determine whether or not the special symbol probability change time determination table 708 and special symbol probability change time, respectively. It means a game played based on the hit determination table 708. A gaming state in which a probability variation game is being performed is referred to as a “probability variation gaming state”. Here, the special symbol probability change per hour determination table 708 is set to have a higher probability of winning per long and short than the special symbol normal per hour determination table 706.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the long winning game is executed by the first special symbol determination unit 704 or the second special symbol determination unit 714, for example, after the long winning game is executed, for example, one half. If the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 determines that the short win game is executed, the probability change will occur with a probability of 100%. It becomes a gaming state. On the other hand, when it is determined that a small hit is made by the first special symbol success / failure determining means 704 or the second special symbol appropriate / bad determination means 714, the game state is changed after the small hit game executing means 514 is executed. There is nothing.

  When the game ball passes through the passing gate 402 and is detected by the gate sensor 560, the normal symbol lottery means 720 extracts a random number by the normal symbol per-determination random number extracting means 722. The extracted random numbers are held up to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 4) by the normal symbol hold counter 723. When the normal symbol hold counter 723 releases the hold, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment means 724 determines whether or not the hold is made. The determination by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 is based on the random number value acquired by the random number extraction means for normal symbol determination 722 and the normal symbol normal time determination table 726 stored in the ROM 512 in the normal gaming state. If the game is in the short-time gaming state, it is performed based on the random number value obtained by the random number extraction means 722 for determining the normal symbol per symbol and the determination table 727 for the normal symbol short-time per hour stored in the ROM 512.

  The normal symbol display control means 516 displays the determination result by the normal symbol appropriate / impossible determination means 724 on the normal symbol display 82. Further, the number of holds by the normal symbol hold counter 723 is displayed on the normal symbol hold display 92 by the normal symbol hold display control means 518.

  The short time game execution means 736 executes the short time game in which the lottery time is shortened in the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 720. In the probability variation game state, a time-short game by the time-short game execution unit 736 may be performed together with the probability variation game by the probability variation game execution unit 734.

  In the present embodiment, the “short-time gaming state” means a gaming state in which the normal symbol winning / non-winning determination unit 724 determines whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate based on the normal symbol short-time / hit determination table 727. Here, the normal symbol time per hour determination table 727 is set so that the lottery time is shorter than the normal symbol normal time per hour determination table 726. Note that the normal symbol normal hour determination table 726 and the normal symbol short time determination table 727 both have a winning probability set as high as 90%, for example. Accordingly, when the normal symbol determination unit 724 determines whether the normal symbol is appropriate or not based on the normal symbol short-time hit determination table 727, the pair of movable pieces 396 are frequently opened and closed, and the third start port 394 is opened and closed. It becomes easy to win a game ball. When a game ball wins at the third start port 394, the game ball is paid out by the ball payout device 170, so that it is possible to play the game without reducing the game balls as much as possible during the short-time game state.

  Here, the lottery in the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 will be described with reference to Tables 1 and 2. Table 1 is a table showing winning probabilities and random numbers. Table 2 is a table for determining the type of jackpot game when the jackpot is won.

  As shown in Table 1, one of the 631 random numbers from 0 to 630 is extracted by the random number extracting means 702 for determination per first special symbol and the random number extracting means 712 for determination per second special symbol. First, it is determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 based on Table 1 whether or not the extracted random number value is won. Specifically, first, the gaming state is determined. If the gaming state is the normal gaming state, 7 and 317 are random numbers, and if the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, 7, 37, 67, 97, 127, 157. , 187, 217, 247, 277, 307, 337, 367, 397, 427, 457, 487, 517, 547, 577 are jackpot random numbers. Note that the same table is used according to the gaming state in the hit determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the hit determination by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. That is, when the determination of winning by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 is performed using the special symbol probability change per-time determination table 708, the determination of winning by the second special symbol probability change determination means 714 is also performed at the time of special symbol probability change. When the winning determination table 708 is used and the winning determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 is performed using the first special symbol normal time winning determination table 706, the second special symbol determination determination is made. The determination of winning by means 714 is also performed using the first special symbol normal hour determination table 706.

  Then, if it is determined that the extracted random number is a jackpot random number, the type of jackpot is determined based on Table 2. A jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot is played. The types of jackpots include long hits where the jackpot game is long and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out, and short hits where the jackpot game is short. In the long win, the per jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as "long win game" corresponding to the long win) is a "probable change short short length" in which both the probabilistic gaming state and the short-time gaming state occur, There is a “ordinary long hit” in which only the short-time gaming state occurs (the probability variation gaming state does not occur) after the end of the long hitting game. For short wins, after the jackpot game (hereinafter, the jackpot game corresponding to the short win is referred to as “short win game”), only a probable game state occurs (no short-time game state occurs). In addition, there is “probability short shortening short chance” in which both a probability change gaming state and a time saving gaming state occur after the short winning game ends.

  On the other hand, if the random number extracted by the first special symbol determination random number extraction means 702 and the second special symbol determination random number extraction means 712 is not a winning random number, whether or not a small hit is won is displayed. 1 is determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. Specifically, regardless of the gaming state, 16, 92, 133, 321, 465, 501, 568, and 610 are small random numbers. When it is determined that the extracted random number is a small hit random number, the small hit game execution means 514 executes the small hit game. As described above, according to Table 1, the winning probability for jackpot is 2/631, and the winning probability for jackpot is 8/631.

  In this way, even if the jackpot is not won, it can be expected to win the jackpot. In addition, since the probability of winning the jackpot is set higher than the probability of winning the jackpot, every time a player wins the jackpot, the player always feels that he has won the jackpot. It can have, and can suppress the fall of interest. Furthermore, since the player will continue to play the game, it will also benefit the hall where the operating rate of the pachinko machine is improved. In addition, in response to the random numbers extracted by the first special symbol determination random number extracting means 702 or the second special symbol determination random number extracting means 712, the big win winning is determined prior to the small winning winning determination. The In other words, if the winning of the jackpot is first, the winning of the jackpot is not performed if the winning of the jackpot is won, but the winning of the jackpot is determined prior to the determination of the winning the jackpot as in this embodiment. If it is judged, the big win will always be won, and the decline of interest can be suppressed. In addition, since the determination of the big win is made only when the big win is not won, the big win and the small win do not overlap. If the big win and the small win are duplicated, it will be necessary to decide which one will be the winner and it will be complicated in terms of control, but the big win was not won as in this embodiment. Control complexity can be avoided by making a small-winning determination only occasionally. In addition, two lottery opportunities for jackpot determination and small hit determination are given, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the tables used for the hit determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 do not necessarily need to be the same table. The first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 704 Different tables may be used for each of the determination units 714. Even in such a case, if the probability variation gaming state, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 both use the probability variation gaming state table, and the normal gaming state For example, it is preferable that a table for a normal gaming state is used for both the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. Thereby, even if the starting opening where a game ball wins is different, the same gaming state is obtained, so that the game is not complicated, and consequently, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the determination result of the first special symbol determination unit 704, the second special symbol determination unit 714, and the normal symbol determination unit 724 does not necessarily include a deviation. For example, if the small hit game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed for a very short time, if the big hit is not won, all may be won.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot has been won, and when determining whether or not the jackpot is won when the jackpot is not won, a remarkable effect is brought about. In addition, it may be drawn in a lump on whether or not the big win and the small win are won.

  The third start opening / closing control means 728 operates the normal electric accessory solenoid 574 to open / close the pair of movable pieces 396 when the lottery result determined by the normal symbol determination unit 724 is successful. When the pair of movable pieces 396 opens and closes, it becomes easy for a game ball to win a prize at the third start port 394. When the pair of movable pieces 396 are in the closed state, it is impossible to win a game ball in the third start port 394, or a game ball win in the third start port 394 is the first start. Although it is more difficult than winning a game ball to the mouth 390 and the second starting port 392, when the pair of movable pieces 396 are in the open state, the winning of the game ball to the third starting port 394 is as follows. It becomes easier than winning a game ball to the start port 390 and the second start port 392. In the present embodiment, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 is configured more difficult than the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390.

  The command transmission unit 746 transmits the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination unit 714 and information related to the lottery result to the peripheral board 600. The “information related to the lottery result” corresponds to an effect time or the like performed in the effect image display device 115.

  The peripheral control board 610 includes command receiving means 750, effect lottery means 760, effect accessory operation executing means 762, and effect opening / closing device state display control means 764.

  The command receiving means 750 receives the lottery result and the information related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 510 by the first special symbol acceptability judging means 704 or the second special symbol acceptability judging means 714.

  The effect lottery means 760 determines by lottery whether or not the effect by the effect item 420 is performed. As a result of the lottery by the effect lottery means 760, when it is determined that the effect by the effect object 420 is to be performed, the effect lottery means 760 uses the lamp drive board 650 and the center decoration drive part relay terminal plate 662 to distribute the ball distribution unit. The motor 668 is operated to produce an effect by the effect item 420. However, since the effect by the effect accessory 420 is performed using the game ball won in the effect opening / closing device 398 (the effect opening / closing device 398), when the game ball does not win the effect opening / closing device 398. No such production is performed.

  The effect accessory operation executing means 762 controls the effect agent 420 via the lamp driving board 650 such as rotational driving of the effect agent 420.

  The stage opening / closing device state display control means 764 controls the display mode of the stage opening / closing device state display lamp 651 via the lamp driving board 650. Specifically, when the opening / closing operation control means 738 operates the jackpot gaming opening / closing apparatus opening / closing solenoid 572 to open / close the opening / closing door 3982 of the effect opening / closing apparatus 398, such information is transmitted by the command transmission means 746 to the peripheral control board. 610 is transmitted. Information transmitted from the command transmission unit 746 to the peripheral control board 610 is received by the command reception unit 750.

  When the command receiving means 750 receives information related to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 3982 of the effect opening / closing device 398, the effect opening / closing device state display control means 764 causes the effect opening / closing device state display lamp via the lamp driving board 650. The display mode of 651 is controlled.

  In the present embodiment, when information indicating that the effect opening / closing device 398 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the operation of the opening / closing door 3982 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 610 by the command transmitting unit 746, the effect opening / closing device is performed. Display control is performed so that the status display lamp 651 displays green. When information indicating that the effect opening / closing device 398 is changed from the open state to the closed state by the operation of the opening / closing door 3982 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 610 by the command transmitting unit 746, the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 is displayed. Is controlled to display in red. That is, display control of the opening / closing door 3982 of the effect opening / closing device 398 is controlled to be green when it is open, and red when it is closed.

  As described above, the effect opening / closing device state display control means 764 causes the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 to be switched between when the effect opening / closing device 398 is in the open state and when it is closed by the opening / closing operation control means 738. Display control is performed in different display modes. Thereby, since the opening / closing state of the effect opening / closing device 398 can be grasped, the player cannot grasp that the effect opening / closing device 398 is open even though the effect opening / closing device 398 is open, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the inability to aim the game ball at the effect opening / closing device 398.

  In particular, in this embodiment, during the jackpot game, there are cases where the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 opens and closes and the effect opening / closing device 398 opens and closes, and it is difficult to know which game ball to win. . In particular, in the case where a stage opening / closing device 398 is provided in addition to the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 provided conventionally, the player wins a game ball in the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 during the jackpot gaming. Try to let them. Therefore, when the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened instead of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, the player feels confused, cannot know where to win the game ball, and is less interesting. In addition, an effect opening / closing device 398 is provided upstream of the effect image display device 115 in the flow direction of the game ball, and the opening / closing door 3982 of the effect opening / closing device 398 intersects the board surface of the game board 5. When it is movable in the direction, the operation of the open / close door 3982 is difficult to grasp as viewed from the player. Therefore, a situation may occur in which a game ball is missed by winning the effect opening / closing device 398 even though the effect opening / closing device 398 is in an open state. Accordingly, the display opening / closing device 398 is opened when the display opening / closing device status display lamp 651 is controlled to be displayed in different display modes when the display opening / closing device 398 is open and when it is closed. In spite of the fact, it is possible to avoid the game opening / closing device 398 from winning a game ball and to prevent a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect opening / closing device status display lamp 651 is provided so as to be displayed in the effect opening / closing device 398, the player only has to hit a game ball aiming at a place emitting green light. Thus, even if the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided in a place where the position is difficult to grasp, such as above the effect image display device 115 as in the present embodiment, the player can aim for the game ball Since it is possible to grasp whether or not it should be entered, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that “the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 is provided so as to be displayed in the effect opening / closing device 398” means that the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 is provided in the effect opening / closing device 398. For example, as in the present embodiment, the back wall in the production opening / closing device 398 is a transparent member, and the inside of the production opening / closing device 398 is lit from behind the transparent member. Also good. That is, it is only necessary that the inside of the effect opening / closing device 398 can be displayed. Further, “within the effect opening / closing device 398” means a region downstream of the opening / closing door 3982 in the flow direction of the game ball.

  Further, since an opening is formed on the front side of the stage winning prize opening 3981 when viewed from the player, a game ball received in the stage winning prize opening 3981 is attached to a glass plate attached to the window frame 39. Can be visually recognized. Thereby, it can be ascertained that the game ball has been received in the stage prize winning opening 3981. In this way, the opening and closing of the jackpot game is achieved by the synergistic effect of being able to grasp that the game ball can be received in the stage winning prize opening 3981 and being able to grasp that the game ball has been received in the stage prize winning opening 3981. Even if the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided separately from the device 400 and the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened in place of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Note that, in this embodiment, the display opening / closing device status display lamp 651 is displayed in green when the display opening / closing device 398 is in the open state, and is displayed in red when the display opening / closing device 398 is in the closed state. However, the mode is not limited as long as it is possible to grasp whether the production opening / closing device 398 is in the open state or the closed state. For example, the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 may be controlled to be turned off when the effect opening / closing device 398 is in a closed state, and may be controlled to be turned on when the effect opening / closing device 398 is in an open state.

[About the operation of the director for the production]
FIG. 26A, which will be described based on FIGS. 24 to 26, is a front view showing the internal configuration of the accessory storage body 422 of the effect accessory 420, and the first effect 樋 426 is the first performance outlet. It is a figure which shows inclining below toward 432. FIG. FIG. 26 (b) is a front view showing the internal configuration of the accessory container 422 of the effect accessory 420, and the first effect 樋 426 is inclined downward toward the second effect 樋 induction port 434. FIG.

  First, in the lamp drive board 650, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or reset, it is confirmed whether or not the detection signal of the rotary motor sensor 660 that detects the rotation position of the effecting instrument 420 is received. If there is no detection signal from the rotating part motor sensor 660, the effect accessory 420 is driven to rotate to a position where the inside of the accessory container 422 of the effect accessory 420 cannot be visually recognized. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, “Diva legend” appears in front of the effect item 420.

  Thereafter, in accordance with the change in the gaming state, a control command for rotationally controlling the effect accessory 420 from the peripheral control board 610 (specifically, the effect accessory action execution means 762) to the lamp drive board 650 is issued. When transmitted, the lamp driving board 650 drives the rotary motor 658 so that the figure 424 inside the accessory container 422 of the effect accessory 420 can be seen as shown in FIG. The effect accessory 420 is driven to rotate. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the figure 424 arranged inside the accessory storage body 422 of the effect accessory 420. Further, when the game ball received from the effect opening / closing device 398 is led to the first effect rod 426, the effect using the game ball can be visually recognized.

  When the control command for effect driving control is transmitted from the peripheral control board 610 to the lamp driving board 650 by using the figure 424, the lamp driving board 650 causes the support shaft 430 to move in the β direction. And reciprocatingly rotate in the γ direction.

  When the support shaft 430 is repeatedly reciprocated in the β direction and the γ direction, the one hand 4241 of the figure 424 rotates around the support shaft 430 with respect to the figure 424 as the support shaft 430 rotates. That is, when the support shaft 430 rotates clockwise (β direction in the figure), the one hand 4241 and the first effect rod 426 are rotated in the β direction with respect to the figure 424 with the support shaft 430 as the rotation center. To do. Further, when the support shaft 430 rotates counterclockwise (γ direction in the drawing), the one hand 4241 and the first effect rod 426 move in the γ direction with respect to the figure 424 with the support shaft 430 as the rotation center. Rotate. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), the first effect 樋 426 is inclined downward toward the first performance exit 432, and the first effect 樋 426 is shown in FIG. 26 (b). Are repeatedly inclined downward toward the second performance 樋 induction port 434.

  If a game ball that has won the effect opening / closing device 398 is present on the first effect cage 426, the support shaft 430 is repeatedly reciprocated clockwise and counterclockwise, so that the game ball is Roll on the 1 stage 樋 426 in the left-right direction. In other words, the support shaft 430 rotates in the opposite direction different from the previous rotation direction before the game ball of the first performance rod 426 is guided to the first performance port 432 or the second performance rod guide port 434. As a result, the game ball rolls on the first effect rod 426 in the left-right direction. When the support shaft 430 rotates to the rotation limit in the γ direction and is held for a certain period of time (if it is held for a certain period of time in the mode of FIG. 26A), the game ball is guided to the first performance port 432. . On the other hand, when the support shaft 430 rotates to the rotation limit in the clockwise direction and is held for a certain period of time (if it is held for a certain period of time in the mode of FIG. 26B), the game ball is in the second stage 樋 induction port 434. Led to.

  When a game ball that rolls on the first performance pole 426 is guided to the first performance exit 432, the game ball is discharged behind the game board 5. On the other hand, when a game ball that rolls on the first effect rod 426 is guided to the second effect rod guide port 434, the game ball falls on the right end 4281 of the second effect rod 428, and from the right end 4281 to the left end 4282. Roll towards Then, the game ball rolling from the right end 4281 toward the left end 4282 is guided to the second performance outlet 432.

  That is, when the support shaft 430 is repeatedly reciprocated in the β direction and the γ direction, the first stage 樋 426 is a game ball that rolls on the first stage 樋 426 as the first stage 432 or the second stage. It swings like a seesaw so as to be guided to one of the ports 436. As a result, only one game ball rolls on the first performance bowl 426 that is swung like a seesaw, so that it is likely to be accepted by the first performance outlet 432 or the second performance outlet 436. Sometimes, the player will feel a sense of thrill, and the excitement will be enhanced.

  Note that the distribution mechanism 450 distributes only one game ball to the effect object 420 even when a plurality of game balls are received from the effect opening / closing device 398. There is only one game ball rolling in a seesaw shape.

  In addition, an effect by the effect object 420 using the game ball (that is, an effect such as whether the game ball is accepted by the first performance exit 432 or the second performance exit 432) is command transmission means 746. Is performed based on the lottery result received by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714.

  Specifically, when performing an effect by the effect object 420, which one of the first performance exit 432 and the first performance 樋 426 is to be the winning performance exit (or an outage performance exit)? The production lottery means 760 determines this. On the other hand, the effect image display device 115 performs an effect suggesting which one of the first performance exit 432 and the second performance exit 436 is a winning game ball. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp which one of the first performance outlet 432 and the second performance outlet 436 is a win if the game ball is led. Therefore, since the player can easily grasp which stage is the winning stage when the stage is performed by the stage effect 420, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  When the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a short hit or a small hit, a game ball rolling on the first performance pole 426 is hit. The stage is directed so that it is led to the stage of the stage and the side of the stage that has been decided. On the other hand, when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is out of play, the game ball rolling on the first performance pole 426 is out of play. The performance is performed so as to be guided to the determined exit. In this way, the winning lottery means 760 determines the winning performance exit and the off-performing performance exit for each performance by the production effect 420. In other words, the winning performance outlet and the extraordinary performance outlet are variable. Thereby, a monotonous game can be avoided, and when a performance is performed by the performance object 420, the player is drawn attention to which performance exit is a hit, and the interest is enhanced.

  In addition, “winning performance exit” means a performance exit indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means may be advantageous to the player, and “out of performance exit” means the lottery means. It is a performance exit that shows that the lottery result by is more unfavorable than the result advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, “the lottery result by the lottery means may be a result advantageous to the player” means “short win or short in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710”. It means “winning the jackpot”. That is, “possibility” means that if the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a short hit, a probable game state is generated, which is advantageous to the player. Can do. In addition, if it is a small hit, it is based on the fact that it cannot be said that the result is advantageous to the player because the normal gaming state continues.

  In addition, the effect using the game ball by the effect object 420 is when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is short win or small hit, This is performed after a series of opening / closing operations (two opening / closing operations in the present embodiment) of the effect opening / closing device 398 by the opening / closing operation control means 738 is completed. Specifically, after the short win game and the small hit game are executed, the symbols of the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 after the occurrence of the next gaming state are changing (the first special symbol display). This is performed after the lighting / flashing display of the symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is started until the determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 704 is displayed. In this specification, the time required for symbol variation is referred to as variation time.

  The game balls that have won the effect opening / closing device 398 at the timing when the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened and held are held by the distribution mechanism 450 until the effect by the effect acting 420 is performed. Is dropped from the drop opening 4221 to the accessory container 422 at the timing when the production is performed.

  It should be noted that it takes a certain amount of time to produce an effect using the game ball by the effect object 420. On the other hand, when the determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 704 is not accompanied by a so-called reach effect, the variation time varies depending on the number of reservations by the first special symbol reservation counter 703, as will be described in detail later. For example, if the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 immediately after the start of fluctuation is 2 or more, the change time is relatively short. If the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 1 or less, the first special symbol is set. The fluctuation time is longer than when the number of holds by the hold counter 703 is 2 or more. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time in the reach production and the fluctuation time in the case where the number of holdings by the first special symbol holding counter 703 is 1 or less are longer than the time required for the production using the game balls by the production actor 420. It has become. On the other hand, the fluctuation time when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 2 or more is shorter than the time required for the play using the game ball by the play accessory 420. When the determination result by the second special symbol determination unit 714 is derived on the second special symbol display 86, the variation time is longer than the time required for the effect using the game ball by the effect agent 420. Always getting longer. Therefore, for the effect using the game ball by the effect agent 420, if the determination result by the first special symbol determination means 704 is derived on the first special symbol display 84, the reach occurs and the second It is executed only when the number of holds by the 1 special symbol hold counter 703 is 1 or less, and is always executed if the determination result by the second special symbol presence / absence determination means 714 is derived to the second special symbol display 86. .

  On the other hand, when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is long hit, the effect using the game ball by the effect accessory 420 is 15 rounds or more. To be done. Here, the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed by the opening / closing operation control means 738 up to two rounds, and the game winning the effect opening / closing device 398 at the timing when the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed. All the balls are discharged behind the pachinko machine 1 by the sorting mechanism 450. After the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed for two rounds, the opening / closing operation control means 738 continues the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 until the 14th round. Since the opening / closing operation of the device 398 is not performed, a game ball cannot be received in the effect opening / closing device 398. Then, after the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is executed, the opening / closing operation control unit 738 executes the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 again only for the first round of the 15th round. The game balls received in the effect opening / closing device 398 in the 15th round are held by the distribution mechanism 450 until the effect using the game balls by the effect actor 420 is started. It falls from the drop opening 4221 to the accessory container 422 at the timing when the performance is performed.

  Here, when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is long hit, the timing at which the effect using the game ball by the effect accessory 420 is performed. As described above, it is after the 15th round in the long game. Specifically, it is performed at any timing from when a game ball is won to the effect opening / closing device 398 until a game state that occurs after the end of the long hit game is started. Therefore, if, for example, a probability variation game state occurs after the long hit game, an effect using the game ball by the effect agent 420 is performed at least before the probability variation game state occurs.

  Further, in the effect image display device 115, when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is short win or small win, and after the long hit gaming state occurs Special effects are performed before the next gaming state occurs. Thereby, when a special effect is performed on the effect image display device 115, the player has a high expectation that a jackpot gaming state will occur, and the interest will be enhanced.

  As described above, the game ball rolling on the first performance pole 426 is changed to the first performance exit 432 or the first special symbol determination unit 704 or the second special symbol determination unit 714 according to the determination of the lottery result. The performance is performed so as to be guided to the second performance exit 436. When a special effect is performed in the effect image display device 115, the game ball rolling on the first effect 樋 426 is guided to the winning performance outlet, and the effect image display device 115 performs the special effect. If not, guide to the off-stage exit. Therefore, when an effect by the effect agent 420 is being performed, the player plays a game with a sense of expectation that the game ball will be received at the winning performance exit.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a short hit or a small hit, the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided with a game ball. If is not accepted, the effect using the game ball is not performed. Therefore, when the effect opening / closing device 398 of the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened, the player is willing to win a game ball in the effect opening / closing device 398 for any reason. Thereby, it is possible not only to see the unilateral performance from the pachinko machine 1, but also to have an emotion that the player himself participates in the game, and the interest is enhanced. Furthermore, since the accessory guide path 440, the first effect kite 426, and the second effect kite 428 are all made of a transparent member so that the game balls rolling on them can be seen, the game balls produce the effect. Since it is possible to grasp a series of trends from winning the opening / closing device 398 to being accepted by the first performance outlet 432 or the second performance outlet 432, the interest is further enhanced.

  Note that the members of the accessory guide path 440, the first effect rod 426, and the second effect rod 428 may be transparent to such an extent that the game balls rolling on them can be visually recognized. That is, a semi-transparent member may be used as long as it can visually recognize the rolling game ball.

[Display area of effect image display device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28 are both views of the effect image display device 115 as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 27, the effect image display device 115 has a first determination result display area 115a, a second determination result display area 115b, a common symbol display area 115c, and a hold display area 1150. Yes.

  The first determination result display area 115a corresponds to the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700, more specifically, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first special symbol display unit 84. This is the area where the results are displayed.

  The second determination result display area 115b corresponds to the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710, more specifically, the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the second special symbol display unit 86. This is the area where the results are displayed.

  The first determination result display area 115 a and the second determination result display area 115 b are arranged in the lower left area of the effect image display device 115. Each has a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of colors, and a lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 according to the display pattern displayed after performing a predetermined effect. The result is derived. However, the lottery result is not derived at the same time in the first determination result display area 115a and the second determination result display area 115b, and is derived based on the order in which the game balls are won at the respective start ports 390, 392, 394. .

  The common symbol display area 115c is an area for deriving one of the lottery results of the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710. In the common symbol display area 115c, one symbol group composed of a plurality of (for example, three) symbol strings is displayed. After the variation effect of this one symbol group is performed, the combination of symbols that have stopped is displayed. The lottery result is derived. The variation effect time of one symbol group is the same as or substantially the same as the above-described variation time. Further, the common symbol display area 115c occupies at least two-thirds or more of all display areas in the effect image display device 115. The first determination result display area 115a, the second determination result display area 115b, and the hold display area 1150 are clearly partitioned. Thus, the player grasps the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 by a combination of one symbol group displayed in the common symbol display area 115c.

  The lottery results derived to the common symbol display area 115c are derived in the order in which the game balls win the respective start openings 390, 392, 394. That is, since the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 are not derived simultaneously, one symbol group includes the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 700. It functions as a common symbol for deriving a lottery result in the symbol lottery means 710. Thereby, even if the lottery is performed by both the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710, it becomes a very clear configuration as seen from the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. .

  Note that one symbol group displayed in the common symbol display area 115c differs between an effect of deriving a lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and an effect of deriving a lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710. Production is performed in a manner.

  Specifically, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, any one of the variable effect patterns is selected and executed. . A variation effect is performed based on the selected variation effect pattern.

  When the selected variation effect pattern is a deviation variation that does not reach, the variation effect pattern is set according to the number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation counter 703. For example, if the number of reserves in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 3 or more, the fluctuation time is relatively long and the fluctuation effect is performed. If the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 2 or less, An off-change effect is performed with a shorter change time than when the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 3 or more. Here, “displacement fluctuation” is a fluctuation in which the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is out and the reach effect is not performed.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, the variation effect is performed based on a predetermined variation effect pattern. In the present embodiment, this specific variation effect pattern is a variation accompanied by a reach effect (hereinafter referred to as “reach variation”). However, when the so-called “short-time gaming state” in which the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 720 is advantageous to the player is occurring, another variation effect different from the reach variation is performed.

  Thus, in the case where the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c and the case where the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, The degree of interest that the person is attracted to the common symbol display area 115c will be different. That is, when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, a reach effect is performed. Therefore, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c and when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, Since the variation mode is different, a monotonous game can be avoided and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  The hold display area 1150 is arranged in the lower right area of the effect image display device 115, and includes a first hold display area 1151 and a second hold display area 1152. The first hold display area 1151 and the second hold display area 1152 are adjacent to each other.

  The first hold display area 1151 has four hold storage display sections, a first hold storage display section 1151a to a fourth hold storage display section 1151d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. The second hold display area 1152 has four hold storage display sections, a fifth hold storage display section 1152a to an eighth hold storage display section 1152d arranged in a line in the left-right direction. That is, the sum of the hold storage display section of the first hold display area 1151 and the hold storage display section of the second hold display area 1152, the upper limit value (first predetermined number) of the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 703, and the first The sum of the upper limit value (second predetermined number) of holding by the 2 special symbol holding counter 713 is the same number. More specifically, the number of the reserved storage display parts in the first hold display area 1151 is equal to the first predetermined number, and the number of the hold display parts in the second hold display area 1152 is equal to the second predetermined number. The number is the same.

  In addition, the first reserved storage display unit 1151a, the second reserved storage display unit 1151b, the third reserved storage display unit 1151c, the fourth reserved storage display unit 1151d, the fifth reserved storage display unit 1152a, the sixth The on-hold storage display unit 1152b, the seventh on-hold storage display unit 1152c, and the eighth on-hold storage display unit 1152d are regularly arranged in this order in the left-right direction, and the derivation to the common symbol display area 115c is Derived in the order listed. Thereby, the order derived | led-out to the common symbol display area 115c can be grasped | ascertained clearly.

  Each hold storage display unit 1151a to 1151d in the first hold display area 1151 is held by the first special symbol hold counter 713, which is a first display mode indicating that the hold can be held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. Is displayed in any one of the second display mode indicating that it is held and the third display mode indicating that it is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703.

  Each of the on-hold storage display portions 1152a to 1152d in the second on-hold display area 1152 can be displayed in any one of the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode. Information regarding the number of holds in the special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 may be hidden.

  Each display mode will be described. In FIG. 27, the display modes of the seventh hold storage display unit 1152c and the eighth hold storage display unit 1152d are the first display mode, the first hold storage display unit 1151a, and the third display mode. The display mode of the hold storage display unit 1151c, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a, and the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is the second display mode, and the second hold storage display unit 1151b and the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d. Is the third display mode.

  In the present embodiment, the first display mode displays a frame (blue in the frame), which means that the first special symbol hold counter 703 can hold the frame. The second display mode means that a character is displayed and held by the second special symbol hold counter 713. The third display mode is displayed in red, which means that it is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. In this way, the display mode is different between the display mode that means being held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the display mode that is held by the second special symbol hold counter 713. .

  In FIG. 28, all of the first hold storage display unit 1151a to the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d are displayed in the first display mode. In addition, all of the fifth reserved storage display unit 1152a to the eighth reserved storage display unit 1152d are not displayed.

  Note that “non-display” means that none of the first display mode, the third display mode, and the second display mode is displayed. That is, the information regarding the number of holds of the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 is not displayed.

[Functional configuration of display device control board]
FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the display device control board 116 in the peripheral board 600. As shown in FIG. 29, the display device control board 116 includes first special symbol image display control means 614, second special symbol image display control means 615, effect image display control means 616, and merge hold display control means 620. And a merged reservation order storage means 626, a first special symbol reservation number storage means 628, and a second special symbol reservation number storage means 630. The merge hold display control means 620 further includes a holdable information image display control means 6201, a first hold information image display control means 6202, a second hold information image display control means 6203, an identification code image display control means 6204, and a merge hold order. Image display control means 6205 is included. The display device control board 116 receives a command transmitted from the main control board 510 via the command receiving means 750 of the peripheral control board 610.

  The first special symbol image display control means 614 derives and displays the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 after performing a predetermined effect in the first determination result display area 115a.

  The second special symbol image display control means 615 derives and displays the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 after performing a predetermined effect in the second determination result display area 115b.

  The effect image display control means 616 specifies that the command receiving means 750 “has won the first start port 390” and “has won the second and third start ports 392, 394” from the main control board 510. Based on the order in which the commands are received, one of the lottery results by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived and displayed.

  The merge hold order display control means 508 is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703, the drawing order of the lottery results derived by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 derived in the common symbol display area 115c. The hold number information being held and the hold number information held by the second special symbol hold counter 713 are displayed in a hold display area 1150 so that they can be recognized.

  The merge hold display control means 620 controls the hold related information related to the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 so that the hold display area 1150 can recognize the hold related information.

  Here, the “holding related information” is, for example, the holding number information indicating the number held by the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the second special symbol holding counter 713, the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the second Holdable information indicating that the special symbol hold counter 713 can hold, the lottery result based on the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (that is, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700) and the second special symbol A lottery result based on hold by the hold counter 713 (that is, a lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710) corresponds to a hold derivation order indicating the order in which the lottery result is drawn to the common symbol display area 115c.

  In addition, the holdable information image display control means 6201 has a first special symbol hold counter 703 and a second special symbol hold counter 713 for the holdable information which is one of the hold related information. Despite being able to hold up to an upper limit of a predetermined number (for example, 4) and a second predetermined number (for example, 4), only the holding by the first special symbol holding counter 703 can be held up to the first predetermined number. Is displayed in the hold display area 1150.

  The first hold information image display control means 6202 and the second hold information image display control means 6203 are each of the hold number information and the second special symbol applied to the first special symbol hold counter 703, which is one of the hold related information. The number-of-holds information relating to the hold counter 713 is displayed in the hold display area 1150.

  The identification code image display control means 6204 has the number-of-holds information and the second special symbol hold on the first special symbol hold counter 703 displayed by the first hold information image display control means 6202 and the second hold information image display control means 6203. A predetermined identification code is added to the number-of-holds information on the counter 713 and displayed.

  The merge hold order image display control means 6205 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the number of hold by the second special symbol hold counter 713 are 1 or more. The derivation order is displayed recognizable.

  The merging hold order storage unit 626 stores the derivation order of the lottery results by the first special symbol lottery unit 700 or the second special symbol lottery unit 710 derived to the common symbol display area 115c. Specifically, the information for specifying that the command receiving means 750 has won each of the start ports 390, 392, 394 is stored based on the order received from the main control board 510.

  The first special symbol hold number storage means 628 receives a command from the main control board 510 for the command receiving means 750 to specify that “the first start port 390 has been won” and is still drawn in the common symbol display area 115c. The number of results that are not derived and displayed is stored. This number corresponds to the number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation counter 703.

  The second special symbol holding number storage means 630 receives a command from the main control board 510 for specifying that the command receiving means 750 has won “the second and third starting ports 392 and 394” and is still a common symbol. The number of lottery results not being derived and displayed is stored in the display area 115c. This number corresponds to the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713.

[Production in the hold display area]
Next, specific effects performed in the hold display area 1150 of the effect image display device 115 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35. 30 to 35 are diagrams showing effects in the hold display area 1150.

  FIG. 30A shows the display of the hold display area 1150 when both the number of holds held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the number of holds held by the second special symbol hold counter 713 are zero. It is a figure which shows an aspect. At this time, the holdable information image display control means 6201 displays a recognizable upper limit value that can be held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. Specifically, all of the first hold storage display unit 1151a to the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d in the first hold display area 1151 are displayed in the first display mode. In the present embodiment, the number of the reserved storage display units displayed in the first display mode corresponds to the number of holds that can be held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. On the other hand, the fifth reserved storage display portion 1152a to the eighth reserved storage display portion 1152d of the second reserved display area 1152 are all hidden (the two-dot chain line in the figure is hidden). Means the same).

  Note that the identification code image display control means 6204 attaches identification codes, for example, by numbers “1” to “8” to the first reserved memory display sections 1151a to 1152d, respectively. If it is displayed in any one of the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode, this identification code can be recognized (in the case of the second display mode in the figure). However, since the character display and the identification code are displayed alternately, they can be recognized). If it is not displayed, this identification code cannot be recognized.

  In FIG. 30 (b), when a game ball wins the first start opening 390 and is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (specifically, the command receiving means 750 wins the "first start opening 390 wins"). When a command for specifying “what has been done” is received from the main control board 510), the first hold information display unit 1151a, which is the extreme position of the first display mode, displays the first hold information image display control means 6202. Thus, the display is controlled from the first display mode to the third display mode. Thereby, it can be recognized that the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is “1”. When the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is N (N is a natural number greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to the first predetermined number), the position from the extreme end of the first display mode arranged in a line , N third display modes are displayed adjacent to each other.

  In FIG. 30 (c), when a game ball wins a prize at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 (specifically, the command receiving means 750 indicates that “the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 When a command for specifying “winning” is received from the main control board 510), the second hold storage display unit 1151b is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode by the merged hold order image display control means 6205. The display is controlled. Thereby, it can be grasped that the number of holdings by the first special symbol holding counter 703 is one and the number of holdings by the second special symbol holding counter 713 is one.

  In addition, when a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a performs display control from non-display to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201. Is done. At this time, it can be felt from the player that the upper limit of holding is increased, and the interest is enhanced.

  The derivation order derived to the common symbol display area 115c is derived in the order of the first reserved storage display unit 1151a to the eighth reserved storage display unit 1152d. That is, the command receiving means 750 is led out to the common symbol display area 115c based on the winning order to the start ports 390, 392, 394 received from the main control board 510. Therefore, in FIG. 30C, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first reserved memory display unit 1151a and the second special symbol displayed on the second reserved memory display unit 1151b. It is derived in the order of the lottery results by the lottery means 710. Thus, the derivation order derived to the common symbol display area 115c can be grasped for the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710.

  In FIG. 30D, when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the first hold memory display unit 1151a. However, the second hold information image display control means 6203 controls the display from the third display mode to the second display mode. In addition, the second hold storage display unit 1151b is controlled from the second display mode to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201. The fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is displayed (maintained) in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201. As described above, the number of holdings by the first special symbol holding counter 703 is zero and the number of holdings by the second special symbol holding counter 713 is N (N is a natural number not less than 1 and not more than the first predetermined number). The second display mode is N adjacent to the first reserved storage display unit 1151a which is the end position of the first display mode arranged in a line as shown in FIG. Is displayed. In addition, the first display mode is a number corresponding to the first predetermined number (for example, four), and the Nth second display mode from the first reserved storage display unit 1151a which is the extreme end position. The second hold storage display unit 1151b, which is adjacent to the first hold storage display unit 1151a, and the second display mode displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1151a are arranged and displayed in a line.

  In FIG. 30 (e), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the first hold memory display unit 1151a. However, the holdable information image display control means 6201 controls the display from the second display mode to the first display mode. Further, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is controlled to be hidden from the first display mode. As a result, the upper limit of the hold feels variable from the viewpoint of the player. Therefore, it becomes interested in when the upper limit of holding increases, and the interest is enhanced.

  FIG. 31A shows the sum of the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 and the number of hold storage display sections in the first hold display area 1151 (four). It is a figure which shows the display mode of each holding | maintenance memory | storage display part 1151a-1152d in the case where is same. However, neither the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 nor the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is zero.

  FIG. 31 (a) shows that the first hold memory display unit 1151a, the second hold memory display unit 1151b, and the fourth hold memory display unit 1151d are displayed in the third display mode by the merged hold order image display control means 6205. It is displayed. Further, the third hold storage display unit 1151c is displayed in the second display mode by the merge hold order image display control means 6205. Further, the fifth hold storage display section 1152a is displayed in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201. As a result, the number of holds held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the number of holds held by the second special symbol hold counter 713 can be recognized. Derivation to the common symbol display area 115c is performed in the order of the first hold display unit 1151a, the second hold storage display unit 1151b, the third hold storage display unit 1151c, and the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d. Therefore, the player can also grasp the derivation order to the common symbol display area 115c.

  In addition, since the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is displayed in the first display mode, the first special symbol hold counter 703 can grasp that the number of hold that can be held is one.

  In FIG. 31 (b), when a game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the merged hold order image display control means 6205 causes the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a to change from the first display mode to the first display mode. Display control is performed in two display modes. The sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is controlled to be displayed from the non-display state to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201.

  In FIG. 31C, when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the change is displayed on each hold memory display unit. The second display mode and the third display mode are shifted one by one to the left as viewed from the front of the page. Specifically, the second hold memory display unit 1151b is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a, and the third hold memory display unit 1151c is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b. The display of the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d is shifted to the display of the third hold storage display unit 1151c, and the display of the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is shifted to the display of the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d. The The fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is display-controlled from the second display mode to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201. The sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is maintained in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201. At this time, the player does not feel that the upper limit of the hold has changed as viewed from the player.

  In FIG. 31 (d), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first reserved storage display unit 1151a is started, as in FIG. 31 (c). The second display mode and the third display mode displayed on each hold storage display unit are shifted one by one to the left as viewed from the front of the page.

  In FIG. 31 (e), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the change is displayed on each hold memory display unit. The second display mode and the third display mode are shifted one by one to the left as viewed from the front of the page. Specifically, the second hold memory display unit 1151b is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a, and the third hold memory display unit 1151c is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b. , Respectively. Then, the sixth reserved storage display unit 1152b is hidden from the first display mode. Further, the fifth hold storage display portion 1152a is displayed (maintained) in the first display mode by the hold display area 1150. Thereby, the player feels that the upper limit value of the holding is variable.

  FIG. 32 (a) shows a hold display area 1150 when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is the same as the first predetermined number and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is zero. The display mode is shown. At this time, the hold storage display units 1151a to 1151d of the first hold display area 1151 are controlled to be displayed in the third display mode by the first hold information image display control means 6202. In addition, each of the storage storage units 1152a to 1152d in the second storage display area 1152 is not displayed.

  In FIG. 32 (b), when a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is switched from non-display by the merged hold order image display control means 6205 to the second display. Display control is performed in the display mode. Thereby, when it sees from a player, it feels that it was held over a reservation upper limit, and interest is raised.

  FIG. 33A shows that the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 reaches the second predetermined number, and all the hold display portions 1151a to 1151d in the first hold display area 1151 The second hold information image display control means 6203 performs display control in the second display mode. In addition, all of the hold display portions 1152a to 1152d in the second hold display area 1152 are controlled to be displayed in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201. At this time, from the viewpoint of the player, it seems that the upper limit of holding is increased to 8 which is the sum of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number, and the interest is enhanced. As described above, when the number of holdings by the first special symbol holding counter 703 is zero and the number of holdings by the second special symbol holding counter 713 is N (N is 1 or more and the first predetermined number or less). Natural number), N second display modes and a number of first display modes corresponding to the first predetermined number are displayed. At this time, N second display modes are displayed adjacent to the first reserved storage display unit 1151a which is the extreme end position of the first display mode arranged in a row, and The number of first display modes corresponding to a predetermined number is a position adjacent to the Nth second display mode from the first reserved storage display unit 1151a which is the end position (for example, N = 4). (The position of the fifth reserved storage display portion 1152a) and the second display mode are arranged in a row. Note that the identification code is the first reserved storage in which the identification code corresponding to 1 to the identification code corresponding to the sum of the first predetermined number and N (8 in FIG. 33A) is the end position. Displayed in order from the display unit 1151a.

  The state shown in FIG. 33A is likely to occur when, for example, the normal symbol lottery means 720 is a so-called “short-time gaming state” in which a lottery advantageous to the player is performed. This is because, in the “short-time gaming state”, the pair of movable pieces 396 frequently opens and closes, so that it becomes easy for the game ball to win the third start port 394.

  At this time, when a game ball wins the second starting port 392, the command receiving means 750 receives a command specifying “having won the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394” from the peripheral board 600. However, a command for specifying the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is also received. That is, when the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is the second predetermined number (upper limit), even if a command for specifying the hold number in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is received, the second predetermined number Therefore, all the displays in the storage storage display units 1151a to 1152d in the first hold display area 1151 and the second hold display area 1152 are maintained by the holdable information image display control means 6201. (See FIG. 33B).

  In FIG. 33 (c), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the change is displayed on each hold memory display unit. The second display mode is shifted to the left as viewed from the front of the page. Specifically, the second hold memory display unit 1151b is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a, and the third hold memory display unit 1151c is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b. The display of the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d is shifted to the display of the third hold storage display unit 1151c. Then, the display of the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d is display-controlled from the second display mode to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201. Further, the eighth reserved storage display portion 1152d is not displayed. The sixth hold storage display unit 1152b and the seventh hold storage display unit 1152c are maintained in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201.

  FIG. 34A shows a display mode of the hold display area 1150 when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 2 and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is 3. The first hold storage display unit 1151a and the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d are controlled to be displayed in the third display mode by the merged hold order image display control means 6205. The second hold storage display unit 1151b, the third hold storage display unit 1151c, and the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a are controlled to be displayed in the second display mode by the merged hold order image display control means 6205. The sixth hold storage display unit 1152b and the seventh hold storage display unit 1152c are controlled to be displayed in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201.

  In FIG. 34 (b), when a game ball wins the first starting port 390, the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is changed from the first display mode to the third display mode by the merged hold order image display control means 6205. Display controlled. Thereby, it can be confirmed that the player feels that the holding upper limit has been increased first, but it is not a mere production that seems to have increased although the holding upper limit has not actually increased, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to feel the feeling that the holding upper limit has actually increased.

  In FIG. 34 (c), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a is started, the change is displayed on each hold memory display unit. The second display mode and the third display mode are shifted one by one to the left as viewed from the front of the page. Specifically, the second hold memory display unit 1151b is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a, and the third hold memory display unit 1151c is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b. The fourth hold storage display unit 1151d displays the third hold storage display unit 1151c, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a displays the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d, The display on hold storage display section 1152b is shifted to the display on fifth hold storage display section 1152a. Then, the display of the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is display-controlled from the third display mode to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201. The seventh hold storage display unit 1152c is maintained in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201.

  In FIG. 34 (d), when a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is moved from the first display mode by the merge hold order image display control means 6205. Display control is performed in the second display mode. In addition, the eighth hold storage display unit 1152d is controlled to display from the non-display to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201. The display modes of the first hold storage display unit 1151a, the second hold storage display unit 1151b, the third hold storage display unit 1151c, the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d, and the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a are as follows. Maintained. Thereby, when it sees from a player, it can feel that the reservation upper limit increased and can raise interest.

  In addition, as the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the hold storage display units 1152a to 1152d of the second hold display area 1152 change from the non-display to the first display mode. Alternatively, display control is performed in the second display mode. In this way, the interest is enhanced by the player feeling that the upper limit of holding increases.

  In FIG. 34 (e), when the variation for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the first hold storage display unit 1151a is started, the change is displayed on each hold storage display unit. The second display mode and the third display mode are shifted one by one to the left as viewed from the front of the page. Specifically, the second hold memory display unit 1151b is displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1151a, and the third hold memory display unit 1151c is displayed on the second hold memory display unit 1151b. The fourth hold storage display unit 1151d displays the third hold storage display unit 1151c, the fifth hold storage display unit 1152a displays the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d, The display on hold storage display section 1152b is shifted to the display on fifth hold storage display section 1152a. Then, the display of the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is display-controlled from the second display mode to the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201. The seventh hold storage display unit 1152c is maintained in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control unit 6201. The eighth reserved storage display unit 1152d is not displayed.

  FIG. 35A shows a display mode of the hold display area 1150 when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 1 and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is 4. The first hold storage display unit 1151a, the second hold storage display unit 1151b, the third hold storage display unit 1151c, and the fourth hold storage display unit 1151d are displayed on the second display by the merged hold order image display control unit 6205. The display is controlled in the form. The fifth hold storage display unit 1152a is controlled to be displayed in the third display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201. The sixth hold storage display unit 1152b, the seventh hold storage display unit 1152c, and the eighth hold storage display unit 1152d are displayed in the first display mode by the holdable information image display control means 6201.

  At this time, if a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the command receiving means 750 will specify a command that “has won the second start port 392 or the third start port 394”. Is received from the peripheral board 600, but a command for specifying the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is also received. That is, when the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is the second predetermined number (upper limit), even if a command for specifying the hold number in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is received, the second predetermined number Therefore, all the displays in the storage storage display sections 1151a to 1152d in the first hold display area 1151 and the second hold display area 1152 are maintained by the merge hold order image display control means 6205. (See FIG. 35B).

  In FIG. 35 (c), when a game ball wins the first starting port 390, the command receiving means 750 receives a command specifying “having won the first starting port 390” from the peripheral board 600. Along with this, a command for specifying the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is also received. Before the game ball wins the first starting port 390 (see FIG. 35B), the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 1, so the sixth hold storage display unit 1152b is The display is controlled from the first display mode to the third display mode by the merge pending order image display control means 6205.

  Next, various control processes executed on the main board 500 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main system processing]
First, a description will be given based on FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of main system processing executed by the CPU 511 (both see FIG. 23) mounted on the main control board 510 of the main board 500.

  As shown in FIG. 36, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 511 (see FIG. 23) first executes a power-on process (step S10). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM 513 (see FIG. 23) is normal (is the set value when a power failure occurs) or not, and is stored in the RAM 513 if normal. A process for returning to the state at the time of a power failure (recovery process) is executed according to the backup data being stored. If the backup data is abnormal, the backup data stored in the RAM 513 is erased and the device setting related to the CPU 511 (normal Initial settings and interrupt timing settings). If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM 513 as backup data. If the RAM erase switch for instructing the erase of the backup data stored in the RAM 513 is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM 513 is cleared and normal initialization is performed. If backup data is not stored in the RAM 513 mounted on the main control board 510 during the power-on process, the RAM 513 is cleared and normal initial setting is performed. In the power-on process, a power-on command indicating that the main control board 510 (see FIG. 23) is activated can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 610 (see FIG. 24) when normal initial setting is executed. The process of setting to is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 610 that the main control board 510 has been activated. In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, the backup data is also stored in the RAM 513, and when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again, the power supply Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the CPU 511 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop process, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by a power supply board (not shown). That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Power is supplied to the device. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board is equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 510 is stopped is transmitted. Is done. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 511 mounted on the main control board 510 in step S20, processing at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S40).

  When the power cut occurs, the operation of the gaming machine is performed before the power failure when the power supply voltage supplied to the power board after the power failure is restored (24V in this embodiment) (hereinafter referred to as “power recovery”). In order to start from the state, the state at the time of power failure occurrence is stored in the RAM 513 as backup data. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing at the time of power-off occurrence is not an interrupt processing, but a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  If the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (NO in step S20), that is, if the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the non-winning random number update for updating the random number used in the game Processing is performed (step S30). Note that the random numbers updated in the non-winning random number update process will be described later.

[Power failure occurrence processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main system process (YES in step S20). First, the CPU 511 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, the checksum of the RAM 513 is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 (step S44). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 513 before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the CPU 511 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 511 prohibits access to the RAM 513 (step S48) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for stopping power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power outage”), Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop in the above processing. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the CPU 511 of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process when the power is cut off is entered. As a result, even when the power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and the infinite loop of FIG. 37 is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period of time, and the CPU 511 is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[About timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the CPU 511 mounted on the main control board 510 of the main board 500 during execution of the main system process. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 511 executes the process from step S60 to step S270 after executing the register standby process (step S50).

  In the sensor monitoring process in step S60, the various sensors described above (gate sensor 560, first start port sensor 580, second start port sensor 582, third start port sensor 584, effect opening / closing device count sensor 570, jackpot game) A process of monitoring the detection signal of the opening / closing device count sensor 576 or the like is executed.

  In the winning random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the winning random number update process is different from the random number updated in the non-winning random number update process. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the winning random number updating process may be updated in the non-winning random number updating process.

  In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 520 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S90, the control process related to the normal symbol display 82 is executed based on the signal detected from the gate sensor 560 in the sensor monitoring process (step S60). The process for performing the opening / closing control of the movable piece 396 is executed.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process in step S100, a series of processes from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the start of the winning game is executed, and the stage winning prize port 3981 and the jackpot gaming prize box 4001 (whichever The processing for performing the opening / closing control of FIG.

  In the output data setting process of step S260, a process of generating a command to be transmitted from the main control board 510 to the peripheral control board 610 is executed based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). .

  In the command transmission process of step S270, a process of transmitting the command set in the output data setting process (step S260) to the peripheral control board 610 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, the register return processing (step S280) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the CPU 511 mounted on the main control board 510 in the above-described non-winning random number update processing (step S30) and winning random number update processing (step S70) will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, when it is determined to start the jackpot game, the random number for determining whether or not to start the jackpot game, whether to start the jackpot game, Design random number used to determine whether or not to make a promising jackpot, to determine whether or not to reach reach when it is determined that jackpot judgment game, non-probability big jackpot game and non-probability jackpot game will not start The reach determination random number used, the fluctuation pattern random number used to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86, and the pair of movable pieces 396 are opened. There is a random number for normal symbol determination used for determining whether to control the state (normal symbol determination).

  Note that the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol controlled by the effect image display device 115 may be determined.

  Among these random numbers, in the winning random number update process, whether or not to determine whether or not the winning determination random number, the design random number, and the pair of movable pieces 396 related to the start of the big hit game or the small hit game are in an open state in which a game ball can be easily received. The random number for judgment per ordinary symbol related to whether or not is updated. That is, the random numbers used for the start of the jackpot game and the determination regarding whether or not the pair of movable pieces 396 are controlled to be opened are updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. By doing so, the probability (probability to determine that the hit game is started, probability to determine that the pair of movable pieces 396 are controlled to be opened) in a predetermined period in each random number can be made constant, and the game It is possible to prevent a person from becoming disadvantaged.

  On the other hand, in the non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number and the fluctuation pattern random number are updated regardless of the occurrence of the winning gaming state and the normal symbol display result. Note that the random numbers updated on the main control board 510 are not limited to those described above. In the non-winning random number update processing, when the counter that updates the random number for determination of correctness makes one round, the determination is made to start counting next. The initial value determination random number or the like for determining the initial value of the random number is also updated.

  In the present embodiment, as means for obtaining the random number for determination of success / failure, two means, a random number extraction means for determination per first special symbol 702 and a random number extraction means for determination per second special symbol 712, are provided. It is good also as a structure which provides this.

[Regarding special symbol / special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). In this special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first, first, second, and third start-up prize winning processes (step S110) are performed. Specifically, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not a game ball is received in the first start port 390, the second start port 392, and the third start port 394, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the first, second, and third start-up winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is checked (steps S120 to S230), and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed.

  When the first, second, and third start opening winning processes (step S110) are finished, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120). If the processing flag is 0 (in step S120). YES) A variation start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol are performed. As will be described in detail later, it is determined whether to start the big hit game or the small hit game, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (NO in step S120), the process proceeds to step S140.

  In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). If the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and the decorative symbol displayed on the effect image display device 115 is determined, and the variation pattern is determined. Is set in the timer (the time from the start of the change display of the special symbol to the stop display) in either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. The processing flag is updated to “2”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S170.

  In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). If the process flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the process during change (step S180) is executed. In the changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is determined based on the time-out. The fluctuation display of is stopped. At this time, if it is determined that the big hit is made in the variation start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and if it is determined that the big hit is made, the process selection flag is set to “4”. , And if neither the big hit or the small win is determined, the processing selection flag is updated to “0”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (NO in step S170), the process proceeds to step S190.

  In step S190, it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). If the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, the jackpot type is determined, and the number of rounds, the opening time, and the game for controlling the opening / closing operation of the stage jackpot 3981 and / or jackpot game jackpot 4001 according to the jackpot type. The number of balls to be awarded is set and the processing flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). If the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), a small hit game process (step S220) is executed. In this small hit game process, the number of times of opening and the opening time for controlling the opening operation of the large winning opening for prize 3981 are set, and the processing flag is updated to “6”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), the process proceeds to step S230.

  In step S230, it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S230). If the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), a special electric utility jackpot control process (step S240) is executed. In this special electric utility jackpot control process, a stage winning prize port 3981 and a jackpot gaming prize box 4001 based on the number of rounds set in the jackpot game start process (step S200), the opening time, and the number of game balls to be awarded. When the jackpot game is finished, it is determined whether or not to operate the probability variation function and the time reduction function, and the process flag is updated to “0”.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 5 in step S230 (NO in step S230), the special electric accessory small hit control process (step S250) is executed. In the special electric accessory small hitting control process (step S250), the opening / closing operation of the special performance prize winning opening 3981 is controlled based on the number of opening times, the opening time and the limited number set in the small hitting game process (step S220). When the small hit game ends, processing for updating the processing flag to “0” is performed.

  When any of the various processes from step S130 to step S250 is executed, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[Random number storage means for special symbols]
Next, based on FIG. 40, the storage system by the hold order storage means 740 (refer FIG. 25) is demonstrated. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of a storage area related to the hold order. A RAM 513 (see FIG. 23) provided in the CPU 511 of the main control board 510 has a special symbol random number storage area 5131 and a processing area 5132. Various data (random determination number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 580, and the second start port sensor 582 or the third start port sensor 584 The various data acquired based on the detection in the above (the random number for success / failure determination, the design random number, and the special design type) are stored in the special design random number storage area 5131 by the holding order storage means 740 in the order in which the game balls are detected. Remembered. The special symbol random number storage area 5131 is divided into eight storage areas from the first storage area 5131a to the eighth storage area 5131h. The first storage area 5131a, the second storage area 5131b, the third storage area 5131c, The fourth storage area 5131d, the fifth storage area 5131e, the sixth storage area 5131f, the seventh storage area 5131g, and the eighth storage area 5131h are stored in this order.

  Each of the eight storage areas from the first storage area 5131a to the eighth storage area 5131h and the processing area 5132 has three storages: a random number storage area for determination of success / failure, a random number storage area for probability variation determination, and a special symbol type storage area. Has an area. The determination random number storage area is an area for storing a determination random number for use in determining whether to start a big hit game or a small win game. In addition, the random number storage area for probability variation determination stores a symbol random number used for determining whether or not the stop symbol pattern of the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is a probability variation symbol in the case of a big hit. It is an area to do. In the special symbol type storage area, whether the success / failure determination random number and the symbol random number are data acquired by detecting the game ball in the first start port sensor 580, the second start port sensor 582, or the third This is an area for storing whether it is data acquired by detecting a game ball in the start port sensor 584. In the present embodiment, when the success / failure determination random number and the design random number are extracted by the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 580, the first special symbol type is set as the second start port sensor 582 or If it is extracted by detection of a game ball by the 3 start sensor 584, the second special symbol type is stored.

  When a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 580, the first special symbol per-determination random number extraction means 702 extracts the winning / failure determination random number and the design random number. The extracted success / failure random numbers and design random numbers are stored in the success / failure determination random number storage area and the probability variation determination random number storage area by the hold order storage unit 740, respectively. Further, the first special symbol type is stored in the special symbol type storage area.

  When a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 582 or the third start port sensor 584, a random number for determination per second special symbol is extracted in the same manner as when a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 580. The means 712 extracts a random number for determination of success / failure and a design random number. The extracted success / failure determination random numbers and symbol random numbers are stored in the determination / non-permission determination random number storage area and the probability variation determination random number storage area, respectively. Further, the second special symbol type is stored in the special symbol type storage area.

  The processing area 5132 is an area that is read when the determination results of various data are derived to the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. In the present embodiment, reading of various data stored in the areas 5131a to 5131h of the special symbol random number storage area 5131 is restricted, and various data stored in the processing area 5132 is determined, and the determination result Is led to the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86.

  Note that the processing region 5132 is not necessarily provided. For example, the reading of various data stored in the storage areas 5131a to 5131h of the special symbol random number storage area 5131 is normally restricted, and is stored in the first storage area 5131a only when the special symbol starts to change. Only various data may be read.

  Further, when the change of the special symbol is started, a shift process of various data stored in each storage area is performed. Details of this shift processing will be described later.

[First, second and third start-up winning prizes]
Next, the first, second, and third start opening prize winning processes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the first, second, and third start-up winning process.

  In the first, second, and third start opening winning process, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start opening 392 or the third start opening 394 (step S1101). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from second start port sensor 582 or third start port sensor 584. At this time, if a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 582, it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 392, and if a detection signal is output from the third start port sensor 584, It is determined that a game ball has won the third start port 394. If no detection signal is output from either the second start port sensor 582 or the third start port sensor 584, no game ball has won a prize in either the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 (step (NO in S1101).

  When it is determined in step S1101 that the game ball has won the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, various data (randomness number for determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) are acquired and provided in the RAM 513. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1102). Note that the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means 712 for determination per second special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1102), the CPU 511 performs a second hold storage process (step S1103). In the second hold storage process, various data (random determination number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 is stored as a special symbol random number. This is a process of storing 1 in the area 5131 and adding 1 to the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713. More specifically, in the special symbol random number storage area 5131, the random number storage region for determination of success / failure, the random number storage region for probability variation determination, the random number region for random determination, the special symbol type storage region, the special symbol type storage region, Remember each one.

  Various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 5131 in the second reserved storage process of step S1103 is the area where n is the smallest among the free areas of the first storage area 5131a to the nth storage area (n is an integer). After that, the process proceeds to step S1104. For example, if the first storage area 5131a is a free area, it is stored in the first storage area 5131a. If the first storage area 5131a is not a free area and the second storage area 5131b is a free area, it is stored in the second storage area 5131b. If the first storage area 5131a and the second storage area 5131b are not empty areas and the third storage area 5131c is an empty area, the CPU 511 stores various data in the third storage area 5131c, and the process proceeds to step S1104.

  When the CPU 511 determines in step S1101 that a game ball has not won any of the second start port 392 and the third start port 394 (NO in step S1101), and in step S1102, the second special symbol hold counter. When it is determined that the counter value 713 has reached the upper limit of 4 (NO in step S1102), the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, the CPU 511 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 390 (step S1104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 580, and when a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 580, a game ball wins the first start port 390. (YES in step S1104). If a detection signal is not output from the first start port sensor 580, it is determined that a game ball has not won the first start port 390 (NO in step S1104).

  When it is determined in step S1104 that a game ball has won at the first starting port 390, various random numbers (randomness number for determination, design random number, special symbol type) are acquired, and a first special symbol hold counter provided in the RAM 513 is obtained. It is determined whether the counter value of 703 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1105). Note that the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means 702 for determination per first special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1105), the CPU 511 performs a first hold storage process (step S1106). In the first hold storage process, various data (random determination randomness, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball at the first starting port 390 are stored in the special symbol random number storage area 5131. In this process, 1 is added to the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703. More specifically, in the special symbol random number storage area 5131, the random number storage region for determination of success / failure, the random number storage region for probability variation determination, the random number region for random determination, the special symbol type storage region, the special symbol type storage region, Remember each one.

  Various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 5131 in the first reserved storage process of step S1106 is the area where n is the smallest among the free areas of the first storage area 5131a to the nth storage area (n is an integer). After that, the process proceeds to step S1104. For example, if the first storage area 5131a is a free area, it is stored in the first storage area 5131a. If the first storage area 5131a is not a free area and the second storage area 5131b is a free area, it is stored in the second storage area 5131b. If the first storage area 5131a and the second storage area 5131b are not empty areas and the third storage area 5131c is an empty area, the CPU 511 stores various data in the third storage area 5131c, and ends the processing.

  When the CPU 511 determines in step S1104 that the game ball has not won the first starting port 390 (NO in step S1104), and in step S1105, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is an upper limit of 4. When it is determined that it has reached (NO in step S1105), the process ends.

  The counter value stored in the first special symbol hold counter 703 or the second special symbol hold counter 713 is the number of various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 5131 acquired in step S1104 or step S1101 (that is, , 8 of the storage areas 5131a to 5131h, the number of storage areas in which various data are stored).

  Further, in step S1102 and step S1105, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 713 is the upper limit value, and the first start If the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is the upper limit when a game ball is won in the mouth 390, the various data acquired in step S1101 or step S1104 are discarded.

  When it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, it is not always necessary to acquire various data (random number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) in step S1101. However, it may be performed between step S1101 to step S1103. For example, various data may be acquired after determining that the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 713 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102 without acquiring various data in step S1101, or in step S1103. You may make it acquire by a 2nd pending | holding memory | storage process.

  Similarly, when it is determined that a game ball has won at the first starting port 390, acquisition of various data (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is not necessarily performed in step S1104, and steps S1104 to S1104 are performed. What is necessary is to perform between step S1106. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1104, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102, or in step S1106 You may make it acquire by a 1st pending | holding memory | storage process.

  As described above, in the first, second, and third start opening prize processing, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start opening 392 or the third start opening 394, and the second special opening is determined. If the count value by the symbol hold counter 713 is less than the upper limit, storage processing of various data acquired by winning the game ball in the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 is performed. After that, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won at the first start opening 390, and if the count value by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is less than the upper limit, the game ball has won at the first start opening 390. Thus, the storage processing of the various data acquired is performed, and the series of processing ends. Accordingly, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 are performed almost simultaneously (within the same 4 ms interrupt process). Is a special symbol in which various data acquired by winning a game ball at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 is ahead of various data acquired by winning a game ball at the first starting port 390. Stored in the random number storage area 5131. That is, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 are performed almost simultaneously, the second special symbol success / failure determination means. The jackpot determination by 714 is performed before the jackpot determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704. As a result, the determination result by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704. First, it is displayed on the second special symbol display 86 and the common symbol display area 115c. In particular, during the short-time game, since the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 720 is a lottery advantageous to the player, the pair of movable pieces 396 are frequently opened and closed, and the game ball wins the third starting port 394. It becomes easy. However, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 are performed almost simultaneously, the second special symbol success / failure determining means 714 By performing the jackpot determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 prior to the jackpot determination by the first special symbol winning / decision means 704, the game ball is won regardless of whether the game ball is won at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394. It is possible to avoid as much as possible the various data that have been discarded, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 511 executes a series of processes in steps S1104 to 1106 after executing a series of processes in steps S1101 to S1103. Instead, the CPU 511 executes steps S1104 to S1106. After executing the series of processes, the series of processes in steps S1101 to S1103 may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the number of various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 5131 (that is, the sum of the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713). Is referred to as “starting memory number”.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not the start memory number is 0 (step S1301). If the starting storage number is not 0 (NO in step S1301), the special symbol random number storage area 5131 is shifted (step S1302). In this shift process, various data stored in the first storage area 5131a are stored in the processing area 5132, and various data stored in the nth storage area (2 ≦ n ≦ 8) are n-1) A process of storing in a storage area (2 ≦ n ≦ 8). When various data is stored only in the first storage area 5131a (when the second storage area 5131b to the eighth storage area 5131h are empty areas), the various data stored in the first storage area 5131a. Is stored in the processing area 5132 only. If the start memory is 0 in step S1301 (YES in step S1301), the process is terminated.

  After performing the shift process in step S1302, the CPU 511 determines whether or not the type stored in the special symbol type storage area of the processing area 5132 is the second special symbol type (step S1303). At this time, if it is the second special symbol type (YES in step S1303), the second special symbol flag is turned ON (step S1303) and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 is decremented by 1 ( Step S1305) and the process proceeds to Step S1308. If the type stored in the special symbol type storage area of the processing region 5132 determined in step S1303 is the first special symbol type (NO in step S1303), the first special symbol flag is turned on (step S1303). Along with S1306), the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is decremented by 1 (step S1307), and the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1308, the CPU 511 determines whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation game is being executed by the probability variation game execution means 734 (step S1308). If the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S1308), the special symbol probability change time determination table 708 is selected (step S1309), and if the probability variation function is not activated (NO in step S1308), special The symbol normal hour determination table 706 is selected (step S1310). Then, the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the random number for determination of success / failure stored in the processing area 5132 (step S1311).

  The jackpot determination in step S1311 is performed by the first special symbol determination unit 704 if the first special symbol flag is ON, and the second special symbol determination unit if the second special symbol flag is ON. 714.

  If the CPU 511 determines that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit in step S1311 (YES in step S1311), the jackpot flag is turned ON (step S1311), and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot is long (step S1313). ). Specifically, it is determined by referring to the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the random number for determination of success or failure whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is long hit. If it is determined that the length is per unit (YES in step S1313), the per unit length flag is turned on (step S1314), then the processing flag is updated to “1” (step S1318), and the processing is terminated. If it is determined in step S1313 that there is no long hit (NO in step S1313), the short hit flag is turned on (step S1315), and then the processing flag is updated to “1” (step S1318). finish. If it is determined that the big hit determination in step S1311 is not a big hit (NO in step S1311), the small hit determination is performed based on Table 1 (step S1316). If it is determined that the small hit is determined in the small hit determination (YES in step S1316), the small hit flag is turned on (step S1317), the process proceeds to step S1318, the processing flag is updated to “1”, and the process is terminated. . If it is determined that the small hit is not a small hit (NO in step S1316), the process proceeds to step S1318, the processing flag is updated to “1”, and the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, after the special symbol random number storage area 5131 is shifted in step S1302, the judgment table selected in step S1310 (special symbol normal hour judgment table 706 or special symbol probability variation per hour judgment). The jackpot determination is performed with reference to the determination table 708) and the random number for determination of success / failure stored in the processing area 5132 (step S1311), but is not limited thereto. For example, the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the determination table (special symbol normal time determination table 706 or special symbol probability variation time determination table 708) and the random number for determination of success / failure stored in the first storage area 5131a, Thereafter, the special symbol random number storage area 5131 may be shifted. At this time, the validity determination random number stored in the first storage area 5131a can be referred to only when the change starts.

  Details of the jackpot determination and the small hit determination are as described above with reference to Table 1 and Table 2.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process (step S150). FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the hour variation pattern table setting process per first special symbol length. FIG. 45 is a table showing variation patterns selected in the first special symbol length per hour pattern table setting process. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 47 is a list chart showing the variation patterns selected in the second special symbol length hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 50 is a list chart showing variation patterns selected in the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process and the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 52 is a flowchart continued from A of FIG. FIG. 53 is a list chart showing a variation pattern selected when reach is determined in the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 55 is a flowchart continued from C in FIG. FIG. 56 is a list chart showing variation patterns selected when reach is determined in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 57 is a list chart showing variation patterns selected when reach is not determined in the first special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process and the second special symbol out-of-variation variation pattern table setting process.

  In the variation pattern setting process of FIG. 43, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1510). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is derived based on the variation of the special symbol this time. If it is determined that the big hit flag is ON (YES in step S1510), it is next determined whether or not the long hit flag is ON (step S1520). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determined in step S1510 is a long hit. If it is determined that the long winning flag is ON (YES in step S1520), it is then determined whether or not the first special symbol flag is ON (step S1530). That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation is based on a winning / decision random number extracted based on the detection of the game ball by the first start sensor 580. If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is ON (YES in step S1530), a first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1540) is performed. In the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1540), it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is being operated (that is, whether or not the time reduction game is being executed by the time reduction game execution means 736), and the probability variation function. Depending on whether it is in operation (that is, whether or not a probability variation game is being executed by the probability variation game execution means 734) and whether or not it is a length per probability variation symbol, the first special symbol length per Select the time variation pattern table.

  If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is not ON (NO in step S1530), the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1550) is performed. In the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1550), whether or not the time reduction function is operating, whether or not the probability variation function is operating, and whether or not the probability variation symbol is per unit Depending on whether or not, the variation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol length is selected.

  If it is determined in step S1520 that the long hit flag is not ON (ie, short hit) (NO in step S1520), short hit variation pattern table setting processing (step S1560) is performed. In the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process, it is determined whether or not the short time function is operating and whether the probability variation function is in operation, and the short hit time variation pattern table is selected according to each gaming state. To do.

  If it is determined in step S1520 that there is no long hit (that is, a short hit), it is not determined whether or not the current variation is based on the detection of the game ball by the first start sensor 580. Accordingly, when a short win occurs in response to the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 390, and in response to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the short hit is generated. In any case, the same variation pattern table is selected.

  If it is determined in step S1510 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1510), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1570). If it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S1570), a small hit hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1580) is performed. In the small hit hour variation pattern setting process, it is determined whether or not the short time function is in operation and whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, and a variation pattern table at the small hit time corresponding to each gaming state is selected. .

  Note that if it is determined in step S1570 that it is a small hit, it is based on the fact that the current change is detected by the first start sensor 580 in the same manner as in the case where it is determined in step S1520 that it is not a long hit. It is not judged whether or not. Accordingly, when a small hit is generated in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 390, and in response to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the small hit is made. In any case, the same variation pattern table is selected.

  If it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1570), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol flag is ON (step S1590). If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is ON (YES in step S1590), a first special symbol outlier variation pattern table setting process (step S1600) is performed. In the first special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the short-time function is activated and whether or not the probability variation function is activated, and then a lottery is performed to determine whether or not reach variation is performed ( Hereinafter, this lottery is referred to as “reach lottery”. In the reach lottery, a reach determination random number is acquired, the acquired reach determination random number is stored in the RAM 513, and the determination value set in a predetermined reach determination table matches the acquired reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not reach variation is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the short-time function is activated, whether or not the probability variation function is activated, whether or not reach variation is performed, and the counter value by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (see FIG. 25). Based on this, the variation pattern table at the time of the first special symbol deviation is selected.

  If it is determined in step S1590 that the first special symbol flag is not ON (NO in step S1590), the second special symbol out-of-shift pattern table setting process (step S1610) is performed. In the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, it is determined whether or not the time-shortening function is operating and whether or not the probability variation function is operating. When the time reduction function is not activated, the reach variation pattern table in which the reach variation is always performed is selected. If the operation is short-time operation, the reach determination random number is acquired and stored in the RAM 513, and the acquired reach determination random number is matched with a determination value set in a predetermined reach determination table. Then, it is determined whether or not reach fluctuation is to be made. Then, it is determined whether or not the short-time function is activated, whether or not the probability variation function is activated, whether or not reach variation is performed, the counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 713 (see FIG. 25), Accordingly, the variation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol deviation is selected.

  When each variation pattern table is set, the process advances to step S1620 to determine the variation pattern. In determining the variation pattern, first, a variation display random number is acquired. Based on the obtained variation display random number, any one of the variation patterns set in the variation pattern table set in step S1540, step S1550, step S1560, step S1580, step S1600 or step S1610 is selected. A variation pattern is determined (step S1620).

  Each variation pattern is set with a variation time and a command, and when the variation pattern is determined (step S1620), the determined variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1630). Then, a command corresponding to the variation pattern set as the selection value is set as an effect command transmitted to the peripheral control board 610. When the variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1630), the variation time corresponding to the set variation pattern is set in the timer (step S1640). That is, the variation time of the special symbol is set in a timer provided in the RAM 513 mounted on the main control board 510. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1650), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  Next, the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process will be described based on FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG. In the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 44, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not the time-saving function is inactive, that is, whether or not the time-saving game is being executed by the time-saving game execution means 736. Is determined (step S 15401). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S 15401), a variation pattern table corresponding to the type of symbol per long when the time reduction function is not activated is selected (step S 15402). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short-length with probability variation or a symbol per regular length. Table 1 is selected, and if the symbol is a normal length, table 2 is selected (see FIG. 45).

  If it is determined in step S 15401 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S 15401), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 734. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S15403). If it is determined that the probability variation function has not been activated (YES in step S15403), a variation pattern table corresponding to the type per long when the time reduction function is activated and when the probability is low is selected (step S15404). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short-length with probability variation or a symbol per regular length. Select table 3 and select table 4 if the symbol per normal length.

  If it is determined in step S15403 that the probability variation function is not inoperative, that is, the probability variation gaming state (NO in step S15403), the variation pattern table corresponding to the type per long when the time-short function is activated and at high probability is selected. (Step S15405). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short-length with probability variation or a symbol per regular length. Select the table 5 and select the table 6 when the symbol per normal length.

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S15402, step S15404, and step S15405, the first special symbol length per variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When table 1 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, a variation number 10 per normal and a song of variation number 12 Per reach A normal, per song reach B of variation number 14 (via song reach A), per song reach C of variation number 16 (via song reach A), per song reach B of variation number 21, and variation number 26 One of the fluctuation patterns per song reach C has a probability of 500/4000, 8500/64, 8000/4000, 20000/64, 2000/2000 and 15000/4000, respectively. select. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when normal per unit is selected as a variation pattern with a probability of 500/4000, command 0AH corresponding to the normal per unit variation pattern is set as an effect command, and 21500 ms is set as a variation time value in a timer. When this normal hit is selected, the reach change is executed after the start of the change of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect image display device 115 (see FIG. 10), and then the stop symbol is long hit without executing the super reach effect. Display to be an aspect. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is used as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When table 2 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the same variation pattern as table 1 is selected with the same probability. Then, similarly to the case where Table 1 is selected, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When table 3 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on this acquired variation pattern random number, per song reach B of variation number 21 and variation number 26 Are selected with a probability of 26000/64000 and 38000/64000, respectively. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the variation pattern per song reach B is selected with a probability of 26000/64000, the command 15H corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B is set as a production command, and the variation time value 63400 ms is set in the timer. To do. When this song reach B is selected, reach variation is performed after the decorative symbol displayed on the effect image display device 115 (see FIG. 10) starts changing, and the character is played on the stage as the song (B) is played. The super reach effect of the singing mode is performed, and then the stop symbol is displayed so as to be the long hit mode.

  When the table 4 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the same variation pattern as the table 3 is selected with the same probability. Then, similarly to the case where the table 3 is selected, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When table 5 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on this acquired variation pattern random number, per song reach B completion of variation number 34 (common) Per song revival of the first song reach B door of variation number 35, per second revival of song reach B door of variation number 36, per third revival of song reach B door of variation number 37, song reach C of variation number 43 Per completion (probable change), per revival of the first song reach C door with variation number 44, per second revival of song reach C door with variation number 45, and per revival of the third song reach C door with variation number 46 Among them, any one of the fluctuation patterns is changed to 30000/60000, 500/4000/500, 6/4000/1000, 6/4000 and 200/4000, respectively. 0,64000 min 500 500,64000 minutes, and selects at 11000 probability of 64000 minutes. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when song reach B per run length with a probability of 30000/60000 is selected as a variation pattern, command 22H corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B finish length is set as a production command and a variation time value is 55000 ms. Is set to the timer. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 6 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern per song reach B completion of the variation number 34 is always selected without obtaining the variation pattern random number. Then, the command 22H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern per song reach B completion length is set as an effect command, and 55000 ms is set as a fluctuation time value in the timer. For the completion of this song reach B, after the start of the variation of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect image display device 115 (see FIG. 10), the super reach in the form in which the character is singing on the stage with the song (B) is displayed. After that, although the stage door closes, the performance that the performance and the character display are not interrupted is repeated three times, and after the song (B) has been played, the stop symbol is displayed in a long-hit manner.

  Thus, the content of the variation pattern when the table 6 is selected is different from the content of the variation pattern when the table 5 is selected. In other words, per song reach B door revival that may be selected at table 5, per song revise B door revival, per third revival song reach B door, per revival of song reach B door, per song reach C completion, song reach Neither the per-first revival of door C, the per-second revival of song reach C-door, or the revival of third-page single reach C-door is selected in Table 6, so these fluctuation patterns are produced. When the image is displayed on the image display device 115, the per unit length of the probability change time is fixed.

  Next, the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process will be described based on FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. In the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 46, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether or not the time-shortage game is being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 736. Is determined (step S15501). If it is determined that the time-shortening function is not activated (YES in step S15501), a variation pattern table corresponding to the type of symbol per long when the time-shortening function is not activated is selected (step S15502). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short-length with probability variation or a symbol per regular length. If the table 7 is selected and the symbol per normal length is selected, the table 8 is selected (see FIG. 47).

  If it is determined in step S15501 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S15501), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 734. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S15503). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S15503), the variation pattern table corresponding to the type per long when the short-time function is activated and when the probability is low is selected (step S15504). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short-length with probability variation or a symbol per regular length. Select the table 9 and select the table 10 when the symbol per normal length.

  If it is determined in step S15503 that the probability variation function is not inactive, that is, the probability variation gaming state is selected (NO in step S15503), the variation pattern table corresponding to the type per length at the time of short-time function activation and high probability is selected. (Step S15505). Specifically, it uses a random number to determine whether the type of symbol per length is a symbol per short-length with probability variation or a symbol per regular length. Select the table 11 and select the table 12 when the symbol per normal length.

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S15502, step S15504, and step S15505, the second special symbol length per variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When the table 7 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, the variation number 49 per normal and the song of the variation number 51 Each variation pattern is 64000 minutes per reach A normal, per song reach B (via song reach A) with variable number 53, and per song reach C (via song reach A) with variable number 55. Of 900, 9800/64000, 12000/64000, and 41300/44000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when normal variation is selected as a variation pattern with a probability of 900/64000, the command 31H corresponding to the variation pattern per normal is set as an effect command, and 15400 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 8 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the same variation pattern as the table 7 is selected. However, the probability that the variation number 53 is selected is 12000/62000 in the table 7, but 15000/64000 in the table 8. Further, the probability that the variation number 55 is selected is 41300/64000 in the table 7, whereas it is 38300/64000 in the table 8. As in the case where the table 7 is selected, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 9 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the song reach B of the variation number 34 per completion (common) Per song revival of the first song reach B door of variation number 35, per second revival of song reach B door of variation number 36, per third revival of song reach B door of variation number 37, song reach C of variation number 43 Per completion (probable change), per revival of the first song reach C door with variation number 44, per second revival of song reach C door with variation number 45, and per revival of the third song reach C door with variation number 46 Of these, one of the fluctuation patterns is 26500/64000, 500/64000, 500/64000, 1000/64000, 300/64000, respectively. 0,64000 minutes 1000 of 500,64000 minutes, and, selected in 4000 probability of 64000 minutes. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, per song reach B completion length is selected with a probability of 26500 of 64000, command 22H corresponding to the selected variation pattern per song reach B completion length is set as a production command, and 55000 ms is set as a timer for the variation time value. Set to. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 11 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, per song reach B of the variation number 21 and the variation number 26 Are selected with a probability of 27500/64000 and 36500/64000, respectively. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the variation pattern per song reach B is selected with a probability of 27500 of 64000, the command 15H corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B is set as a production command and the variation time value 63400 ms is set in the timer. To do.

  When the table 10 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern per song reach B completion of the variation number 34 is always selected without obtaining the variation pattern random number. Then, the command 22H corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B completion length is set as an effect command, and 55000 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer.

  Thus, the content of the variation pattern when the table 10 is selected is different from the content of the variation pattern when the table 9 is selected. In other words, per song revive B door 1 revival, per song revival B door revival, singing reach B door 3 revival, song reach C complete run, song reach Neither the per-resurrection of C door, the per-revival of song reach C-door, or the per-revival of song reach C-door is selected on the table 10, so these fluctuation patterns are produced. When the image is displayed on the image display device 115, the permissible change time length is determined.

  Next, the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50. FIG. In the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 48, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is not activated, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game is being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 736 ( Step S15601). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S15601), a variation pattern table in the case where the time reduction function is not activated is selected (step S15602). That is, when the time-short game is not executed by the time-short game execution means 736, the table 13 is selected regardless of whether or not the probability change game is executed by the probability change game execution means 734 (see FIG. 50).

  If it is determined in step S15601 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S15601), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 734. It is determined whether or not the state is not performed (step S15603). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S15603), a variation pattern table is selected when the time reduction function is activated and the probability variation function is not activated (step S15604). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 736 and the probability change game is not executed by the probability change game execution means 734, the table 14 is selected (see FIG. 50).

  If it is determined in step S15601 that the time-shortening function is not inactive (NO in step S15603), a variation pattern table is selected when the time-shortening function is activated and the probability variation function is activated (step S15605). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 736 and the probability change game is executed by the probability change game execution means 734, the table 15 is selected (see FIG. 50).

  When the table 13 is selected in the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern with the chance of variation number 27 is selected with a probability of 100% (that is, always). Then, the command 1BH is set as an effect command, and 24600 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer. At the chance (short win), after the decorative design is variably displayed on the effect image display device 115, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a short win different from the long win without the reach effect.

  When the table 14 is selected in the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the song reach B intro of the variation number 18 and the song reach of the variation number 23 are obtained based on the obtained variation pattern random number. One of the variation patterns out of the C intro is selected with a probability of 24000/64000 and 40000/64000, respectively. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when song reach B intro miss is selected with a probability of 24,000 of 64000, command 12H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of song reach B intro is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a variation time value in a timer. . If this song reach B intro is selected, the decorative image is displayed on the effect image display device 115 variably, and then the intro of the song (B) is played with the reach effect. The stop display is performed in a short hit mode different from the win. Similarly, the variation pattern outside the song reach C intro is selected with a probability of 40,000 / 4000, the command 17H of the selected variation pattern is set as a production command, and 24100 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer.

  When the table 15 is selected in the short hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process, a fluctuation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired fluctuation pattern random number, the song reach B door short number of the fluctuation number 30 is changed per short number. The variation pattern of any one of 31 song reach B 3 pieces, variation number 39 song reach C door 1 short short, and variation number 40 song reach C door 3 short short respectively. Select with probabilities of 14000/4000, 4000/4000, 38000/64000, and 8000/64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the song reach B door first short per 14000 is selected with a probability of 14000 of 64000, the command 1EH corresponding to the fluctuation pattern per song reach B door first short is set as a production command and the fluctuation time A value of 21800 ms is set in the timer. When this song reach B door first short hit is selected, after the decorative design is displayed in a varying manner on the effect image display device 115, the song (B) is played and the super reach in the form where the character is singing on the stage is displayed. Then, the door of the stage is closed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a short hit manner different from the long hit. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, and a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a corresponding variation time value is set in the timer.

  Next, the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. In the small hitting time variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 49, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is not activated, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game is being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 736 ( Step S15801). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S15801), a variation pattern table in the case where the time reduction function is not activated is selected (step S15802). That is, when the time-short game is not executed by the time-short game execution means 736, the table 16 is selected regardless of whether or not the probability-change game is executed by the probability-change game execution means 734 (see FIG. 50).

  If it is determined in step S15801 that the time-shortening function is not activated (NO in step S15801), it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is not activated, that is, whether or not the probability variation game is not executed by the probability variation game execution means 734. Is determined (step S15803). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S15803), a variation pattern table is selected when the time reduction function is activated and the probability variation function is not activated (step S15804). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 736 and the probability change game is not executed by the probability change game execution means 734, the table 17 is selected (see FIG. 50).

  If it is determined in step S15801 that the time reduction function is not inactive (NO in step S15803), a variation pattern table at the time of time reduction function activation and probability variation function activation is selected (step S15805). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 736 and the probability change game is executed by the probability change game execution means 734, the table 18 is selected (see FIG. 50).

  When the table 16 is selected in the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern of the chance of the variation number 28 is selected with a probability of 100% (that is, always). Then, command 1CH is set as an effect command, and 24600 ms is set as a variable time value in the timer. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the chance number 28 with the variation number 28 is the same mode as the variation pattern of the chance number 27 with the variation number 27.

  When table 17 is selected in the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, song reach B intro of variation number 19 and song reach of variation number 24 are reached. One of the variation patterns out of the C intro is selected with a probability of 40000/64000 and 24000/64000, respectively. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the song reach B intro miss is selected with a probability of 40000/60000, the command 13H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the selected song reach B intro miss is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a timer for the variation time value. set. In this embodiment, the singing reach B intro of the variation number 19 and the singing reach C intro of the variation number 24 are different from the singing reach B intro of the variation number 18 and the singing reach C intro of the variation number 23, respectively. This is the same mode as the variation pattern.

  When the table 18 is selected in the short hit variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, the song reach B door first variation per variation number 32, variation number One of 33 variation patterns of song reach B door, per variation number 41 of song reach C door first per hit, and variation number 42 of song reach C door second per hit, Select with a probability of 17000/64000, 14500/64000, 10,000 / 64000, and 22500/64000, respectively. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the song reach B door first small hit is selected with a probability of 17000 of 64000, the command 20H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the song reach B door first small shot is set as a production command and the fluctuation time A value of 21800 ms is set in the timer. In this embodiment, the song reach B door first hit per variation number 32, the song reach B door second hit per variation number 33, the song reach C door first hit per variation number 41, and The variation pattern per song reach C door of the variation number 42 is small for the song reach B door of the variation number 30, the song reach B door of the variation number 31, the song reach of the variation number 39, respectively. The pattern is the same as the variation pattern of the first small door of the C door and the variation pattern of the song reach C door of the variation number 40.

  Next, the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 51, 52, 53 and 57. FIG. In the first special out-of-symbol variation pattern table setting process of FIGS. 51 and 52, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether the time-shortening game is being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 736. It is determined whether or not (step S16001). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S 16001), then the number of first special symbols held immediately after the start of fluctuation (that is, the counter value by the first special symbol holding counter 703 (see FIG. 25)). It is determined whether it is 0 (step S 16002). If it is determined that the number of reserved first symbol symbols is zero (YES in step S 16002), it is determined whether or not reach variation is to be executed (step S 16003). Specifically, one reach random number is acquired from the reach random numbers from 0 to 240, and the acquired reach random number corresponds to a predetermined reach determination value (from 0 to 25 in the present embodiment). A so-called reach lottery is performed to determine whether or not. If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16003), and the table 19 (see FIG. 53) is selected (step S16004).

  Note that “the number of reserved first special symbols” means the number of reserved lotteries by the first special symbol lottery means 700 in the present embodiment. That is, in this embodiment, although the random number for determination of success / failure is obtained by the random number extraction means for determination of first special symbol 702, the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol determination / rejection determination means 704 is suspended. The number of holdings for determination of success / failure by the determination unit 704 corresponds to the number of holdings for the first special symbol. Instead of this, the acquisition of random numbers for determination of success / failure by the first special symbol determination random number extracting means 702 may be suspended when a game ball wins the first starting port 390. In this case, the number of suspensions of acquisition of the random numbers for success / failure determination by the random number extraction means for determination per first special symbol 702 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the first special symbol. Further, when the game ball wins the first start opening 390, the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means for determination of first special symbol 702, and the random number for determination of success / failure acquired by the first special symbol determination of success / failure determination means 704 is obtained. However, it may be suspended to display the determination result on the first special symbol display 84. In this case, the number of suspensions of display on the first special symbol display 84 of the determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 704 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the first special symbol.

  When it is determined in step S16003 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16003), the table 25 (see FIG. 57) is selected (step S16005).

  If it is determined in step S 16002 that the number of reserved first symbol symbols is not zero (NO in step S 16002), it is determined whether the number of reserved first symbol symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is 1 (step S 16006). . Here, if it is determined that the number of holds of the first special symbol is 1 (YES in step S16006), it is determined whether or not the reach variation is executed as in the case where the number of holds of the first special symbol is 1. (Step S16007). If a win is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16007), and the table 19 (see FIG. 53) is selected (step S16008). However, since the reach determination value is 0 to 23 when the number of the first special symbol hold is 1, in the reach lottery as compared with the case where the number of the first special symbol hold is 0 (the reach determination value is 0 to 25). The winning probability is low.

  When it is determined in step S16007 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16007), the table 25 (see FIG. 57) is selected (step S16009).

  If it is determined in step S16006 that the number of retained first special symbols is not 1 (NO in step S16006), it is determined whether the number of retained first special symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is 2 (step S16010). . Here, if it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is 2 (YES in step S16010), whether or not the reach variation is to be executed, as in the case where the number of the first special symbol hold is 0 and 1. Judgment is made (step S16011). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16011), and the table 19 (see FIG. 53) is selected (step S16012). However, since the reach determination value is 0 to 21 when the number of the first special symbol held is 2, the winning probability in the reach lottery is lower than when the number of the first special symbol held is 0 and 1.

  When it is determined in step S16011 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16011), the table 26 (see FIG. 57) is selected (step S16013).

  If it is determined in step S16010 that the number of first special symbols held is not 2 (NO in step S16014), it is determined that the number of first special symbols held immediately after the start of variation is 3, and the first special symbol is held. As in the case where the numbers are 0, 1, and 2, it is determined whether or not reach variation is executed (step S16014). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16014), and the table 19 (see FIG. 53) is selected (step S16015). However, since the reach determination value is 0 to 15 when the number of holds of the first special symbol is 3, the winning probability in the reach lottery is lower than when the number of holds of the first special symbol is 0, 1, and 2.

When it is determined not to perform the reach varying in step S16014, i.e., to be elected reach lottery (NO in step S16014), to select the table 27 (see FIG. 57) (step S1601 6).

  Thus, when the time-shortening function is not activated, the reach lottery between the number of the first special symbol hold and the winning probability in the reach lottery is less likely to win the reach lottery as the number of the first special symbol hold is smaller. There is a correlation that the greater the number of holds for one special symbol, the more difficult it is to win a reach lottery. As a result, when the reach variation is executed when the number of reserved first symbol symbols is 3, for example, the expectation of winning the long hit, short hit or small win increases, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. .

  If it is determined in step S 16001 that the time saving function is not inactive, that is, the time saving gaming state is set (NO in step S 16001), the processing shown in FIG. 52 is performed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is not activated, that is, whether or not the probability variation game is not executed by the probability variation game execution means 734 (step S16017). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S16017), it is determined whether or not reach variation is performed (step S16018). The determination as to whether or not to execute the reach variation is performed in the same manner as the determination of whether or not the reach variation is performed when the time reduction function is not activated (step S16003, step S16007, step S16011, step S16014). Depending on the result. If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16018), and the table 20 (see FIG. 53) is selected (step S16019).

  When it is determined in step S16018 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16018), the table 28 (see FIG. 57) is selected (step S16020).

  If it is determined in step S16017 that the probability variation function is not inactive, that is, the probability variation gaming state (NO in step S16017), it is determined whether or not the reach variation is to be executed as in the case where the time reduction function is not activated. (Step S16021). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16021), and the table 21 (see FIG. 53) is selected (step S16022). However, since the reach judgment value is only 0 and 1 when the time-shortening function is activated and the probability-changing mechanism is not activated, that is, when the probability-changing gaming state is not, the reach variation is smaller than when the time-shortening function is not activated. The probability of being executed is very low. As a result, when the reach variation is executed when the short-time function is activated and the probability variation mechanism is not activated, the expectation of winning the long hit, short hit or small hit increases, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When it is determined in step S16021 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16021), the table 29 (see FIG. 57) is selected (step S16023).

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S16004, step S16005, step S16008, step S16009, step S16012, step S16013, step S16015, step S16016, step S16019, step S16020, step S16022 and step S16023, the first special symbol loss The time variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When the table 19 (see FIG. 53) is selected in the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the variation number 8 is out of normal (1 Pre-design), variation number 9 out of normal (after one design), variation number 11 song reach A out, variation number 13 song reach B (via song reach A), variation number 15 song reach C (single reach) Any of the following: A) off, song reach B intro of variation number 17, out of song reach B of variation number 20, song reach C intro of variation number 22, and song reach C out of variation number 25 The fluctuation patterns are 19000/14000, 14000/64000, 12000/64000, 600/44000, 3/64000, respectively. 0,64000 minutes 7000,64000 min 6000 4200,64000 minutes, and selected in 900 probability of 64000 minutes. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when normal deviation of variation number 8 (one symbol before) is selected with a probability of 19000 of 64000, command 08H corresponding to the variation pattern of normal deviation (one symbol before) is set as an effect command and variation time A value of 15600 ms is set in the timer. When this variation pattern of normal deviation (one symbol before) is selected, reach variation is executed after the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect image display device 115 (see FIG. 10) is started. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol that is not one of the small hits, and is one symbol before the reach symbol (for example, symbol 6 when symbol 7 is reach). Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, and a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in a timer.

  When the table 20 (see FIG. 53) is selected in the first special symbol variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the song reach B intro of variation number 17 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. One of the variation patterns of singing reach out of song reach B of variation number 20, singing reach C out of variation number 22 and singing reach C out of variation number 25 is 100/64000/64000 min. Select with probability of 50000, 100/64000, and 13800/64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when a song reach B intro divergence is selected as a variation pattern with a probability of 100/64000, the command 11H corresponding to the variation pattern of the song reach B intro is set as a production command, and a variation time value of 25700 ms is set as a timer. Set to. When this song reach B intro is selected, the intro of the song (B) is played with the reach effect after starting the change of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect image display device 115 (see FIG. 10), but before starting to sing. In addition, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a so-called unreachable manner that is different from both the big hit and the small win. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, and the command of the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and the variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 21 (see FIG. 53) is selected in the first special symbol variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and a song reach B door with a variation number 29 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. One of the variation patterns of the first off and the variation number 38 of the song reach C door 1 off is selected with a probability of 40000/64000 and 24000/64000, respectively. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the variation pattern of the song reach B door 1 is selected with a probability of 40000/64000, the command 1DH corresponding to the variation pattern of the song reach B door 1 displacement is set as the production command 1DH. 21800 ms is set in the timer as the fluctuation time value. When this song reach B door 1 is selected, the song (B) is played and the character is singing on the stage after the decoration pattern displayed on the effect image display device 115 (see FIG. 10) starts changing. The super-reach of the aspect is displayed, and then the door of the stage is closed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a so-called reach-excluded manner in which the long win, the short win and the small win are different. Similarly, the variation pattern of the first song reach door C is also selected with a probability of 24000/64000, the command 26H of the selected variation pattern is set as a production command, and 18600 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer. To do.

  In the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, when the table 25 (see FIG. 57) is selected, the variation pattern of the normal variation with the variation number 1 is always selected, and the table 26 (see FIG. 57) is selected. When the table 27 (see FIG. 57) is selected, the variation pattern of the shortened variation 2 with the variation number 3 is always selected and the table 28 (see FIG. 57) is always selected. Is always selected, the variation pattern of the shortened variation 6 of the variation number 7 is selected, and when the table 29 (see FIG. 57) is selected, the variation pattern of the shortened variation 4 of the variation number 5 is always selected.

  That is, in the first special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, if the time reduction function is not activated, the variation pattern according to the number of retained first special symbols (that is, the counter value by the first special symbol retention counter 703). Will be selected. Therefore, if the number of holds of the first special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 0 or 1, the normal change of the change number 1 is selected, the command 01H is set as an effect command, and the change time value is set to 11800 ms as a timer. set. When the first special symbol hold number immediately after the start of the change is 2, select the change pattern of the change 1 of the short change of the change number 2, set the command 02H as the production command, and set the change time value to 6000 ms as the timer set. If the number of the first special symbol hold immediately after the start of the change is 3, select the change pattern of the shortened change 2 of the change number 3, set the command 03H as the effect command, and set 2900ms as the change time value to the timer set. In the normal variation, the shortening variation 1 and the shortening variation 2, after the start of the variation of the decoration symbol displayed on the effect image display device 115, the decoration is different from the long hit, short hit and small hit without the reach effect. Stop displaying symbols.

  In the first special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, if the operation is short-time, whether or not the probability variation function is activated regardless of the number of first special symbols held, that is, probability variation game execution means. At 734, the variation pattern is selected according to whether or not the probability variation game is being executed. Accordingly, when the probability variation function is not activated, the shortened variation 6 of the variation number 7 is selected, the command 07H is set as an effect command, and 2300 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer. When the probability variation function is activated, the short variation 4 of the variation number 5 is selected, the command 05H is set as the effect command, and 2200 ms is set as the variation time value in the timer.

  Next, the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 54, 55, 56 and 57. FIG. 54 and 55, in the second special symbol out-of-symbol variation pattern table setting process, the CPU 511 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether the time-shortening game is being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 736. It is determined whether or not (step S16101). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S16101), the table 22 is selected (step S16102). Although details will be described later, since a deviation variation pattern that does not involve a reach effect is not set in the table 22, a reach effect is always performed when the table 22 is selected.

  If it is determined in step S16101 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, the time-saving game is being executed by the time-saving game execution means 736 (NO in step S16101), the processing shown in FIG. 55 is performed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is not activated, that is, whether or not the probability variation game is being executed by the probability variation game execution means 734 (step S16103). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S16103), it is determined whether or not reach variation is executed (step S16104). Specifically, in the same manner as the reach lottery in the second special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, a reach random number from zero to 240 is acquired, and the acquired reach random number is a predetermined reach determination value (this embodiment) In the embodiment, reach lottery is performed to determine whether or not 0 and 1). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16104), and the table 23 (see FIG. 56) is selected (step S16105).

  When it is determined in step S16104 that the reach change is not performed, that is, when the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16104), the number of second special symbols held immediately after the start of the change (ie, the second special symbol hold counter 713). It is determined whether or not the counter value (see FIG. 25) is 0 (step S16106). If it is determined that the second special symbol hold number immediately after the start of fluctuation is 0 (YES in step S16106), table 30 is selected (step S16107), and if the second special symbol hold number is not zero (step S16106) The table 31 is selected (NO in S16106) (step S16108).

  In the present embodiment, “the number of second special symbol reservations” means the number of lottery reservations by the second special symbol lottery means 710. That is, in this embodiment, although the random number for determination of success / failure is obtained by the random number extraction means for determination of second special symbol 712, the determination of success / failure by the second special symbol determination / rejection determination means 714 is suspended. The number of reservations for determination of success / failure by the determination unit 714 corresponds to the number of reservations for the second special symbol. Instead of this, the acquisition of random numbers for determination of success / failure by the second special symbol determination random number extracting means 712 may be suspended when a game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394. . In this case, the number of suspensions of acquisition of random numbers for success / failure determination by the second special symbol determination random number extraction means 712 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the second special symbol. Further, when a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the second special symbol hit determination random number extracting means 712 acquires the pass / fail determination random number and the second special symbol pass / fail determination means 714 Although it is determined whether or not the obtained random number for determining whether or not is correct, displaying the determination result on the second special symbol display 86 may be suspended. In this case, the number of suspensions of display on the second special symbol display 86 of the determination result by the second special symbol determination unit 714 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S16103 that the probability variation function is not inoperative, that is, the probability variation gaming state (NO in step S16103), it is determined whether or not to execute reach variation as in the case where the probability variation function is not activated. Judgment is made (step S16109). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16109), and the table 24 (see FIG. 56) is selected. However, the reach determination value is 0 only when the short time function is activated and the probability variation function is activated in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process.

  When it is determined in step S16109 that the reach variation is not to be executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16109), the number of second special symbols held immediately after the start of the variation (that is, the second special symbol hold counter 713 ( It is determined whether or not the counter value (see FIG. 25) is 0 (step S16111). When it is determined that the number of reserved special symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is zero (YES in step S16111), table 32 is selected (step S16112), and when the number of reserved special symbols is not zero (step S16112). The table 33 is selected (NO in S16111) (step S16113).

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S16102, step S16105, step S16107, step S16108, step S16110, step S16112, and step S16113, the second special symbol out-of-design variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  It should be noted that when the time-shortening function is not activated, that is, when the time-shortening game is not being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 736, as shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. In the table setting process, a reach lottery is performed (step S16003), and the table 19 in which only the reach effect is set as a variation pattern is selected in response to the winning of the reach lottery (step S16004), while the second In the special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, the table 22 in which only the reach effect is set as the variation pattern is selected without performing the reach lottery (step S16102). Accordingly, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 when the time reduction function is not activated, the reach variation is always executed. Thereby, when the time-shortening function is not activated, the second start port 392 and the third start port 394 become more prestigious than the first start port 390, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When the table 22 (see FIG. 56) is selected in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, a normal deviation (1) of the variation number 47 is obtained. Pre-design), variation number 48 is out of normal (after one design), variation number 50 is out of song reach A, variation number 52 is out of song reach B (via song reach A), and variation number 54 is in song reach C ( One of the fluctuation patterns is selected with a probability of 27500/64000, 27500/64000, 8400/64000, 400/64000, and 200/44000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when normal deviation (before 1 symbol) is selected with a probability of 27500 of 64000, command 2FH corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of normal deviation (before 1 symbol) is set as an effect command, and the variation time value is 9500 ms. Set to timer. When the variation pattern of this normal deviation (one symbol before) is selected, reach variation is executed after the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect image display device 115 is started. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol one before the reach symbol (for example, symbol 6 when symbol 7 is reached). Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, and a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in a timer.

  When the table 23 (see FIG. 56) is selected in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the song reach B intro of variation number 17 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. The variation patterns of singing out, singing reach out of variation No. 20, out of singing reach C in variation number 22, and out of singing reach C of variation number 25, and 50,000 out of singing reach C, 60000 of 64000, and 64000, respectively. Select with probability of 100 minutes and 13800 of 64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when singing reach intro miss is selected with a probability of 100/64000, the command 11H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of singing reach intro is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a variation time value in a timer. When the variation pattern of the song reach B intro is selected, the decorative pattern displayed on the effect image display device 115 is displayed in a variable manner, and then the intro of the song (B) is played with the reach effect, but before the singing starts. The decorative design is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the long hit, short hit and small hit. Similarly, other variation patterns are also selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 24 (see FIG. 56) is selected in the second special symbol variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the song reach B door of variation number 29 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. One of the variation patterns is selected with a probability of 40000/64000 and 24000/64000, respectively, of the first one and the first of the song reach C door with variation number 38. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the change of the first song reach B door is selected as the variation pattern with a probability of 40000/60000, the command 1DH corresponding to the variation pattern of the first song reach B door off the first set is set as a production command. Then, 21800 ms is set in the timer as the variation time value. When this song reach B door 1 is selected, the decorative pattern displayed on the effect image display device 115 is displayed in a variable manner, and then the song (B) is played and the character is singing on the stage. After that, the door of the stage is closed, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the long hit, short hit and small hit. Similarly, the variation pattern of the first song reach door C is also selected with a probability of 24000/64000, the command 26H corresponding to the variation pattern is set as a production command, and the variation time value is set to 18600 ms in the timer. To do.

  In the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, whenever the table 30 (see FIG. 57) is selected, the variation pattern of the shortened variation 5 of the variation number 6 is selected, and the table 31 (see FIG. 57) is selected. Then, the variation pattern of the shortened variation 6 of the variation number 7 is always selected, and when the table 32 (see FIG. 57) is selected, the variation pattern of the shortened variation 3 of the variation number 4 is always selected and the table 33 (see FIG. 57). ) Is always selected, the variation pattern of the shortened variation 4 with the variation number 5 is selected, and when the table 33 (see FIG. 57) is selected, the variation pattern of the shortened variation 5 with the variation number 6 is always selected.

  That is, in the variation pattern table setting process at the time of the second special symbol outage, if the time is short-time operation, the variation pattern is selected according to the number of second special symbols held (that is, the counter value by the second special symbol holding counter 713). Will be. Accordingly, if the number of reserved symbols in the second special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 0 and the probability change function is not activated, the shortened change 5 of the change number 6 is selected, and the command 06H is set as an effect command. At the same time, 5200 ms is set in the timer as the fluctuation time value.

In addition, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 0 and the probability change function is activated, the shortened change 3 of the change number 4 is selected, and the command 04H is set as an effect command. Then, 4800 ms is set in the timer as the variation time value. On the other hand, if the number of holdings of the second special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 1, 2 or 3, and the probability change function is not activated, the shortened change 6 of the change number 7 is selected, and the command 07H is set as an effect command. In addition, 2300 ms is set in the timer as the fluctuation time value. Also, if the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 1, 2 or 3, and the probability change function is activated, the shortened change 4 of the change number 5 is selected and the command 05H is set as an effect command. At the same time, 2200 ms is set in the timer as the variation time value.

  Thus, when the probability variation function is not activated, when the variation number 6 is selected, the variation time becomes longer than when the variation number 7 is selected, and when the probability variation function is activated, the variation number 4 is When selected, the variation time becomes longer than when variation number 5 is selected. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the probability variation function is activated, if the time reduction function is activated, the variation time is zero when the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is 1, 2, or 3. become longer. As a result, if the time reduction function is activated, the variation time will be longer when the number of reserved second symbol symbols is 0 than when 1, 2, or 3, so that the decoration symbol will not vary. It can suppress the decrease of interest by. That is, during the short-time operation, the pair of movable pieces 396 are opened and closed, so that the game balls that are driven toward the game area 37 are more likely to win the third start port 394 than the first start port 390. When the short-time function is activated, the number of the second special symbol is generally larger than the number of the first special symbol. Therefore, if the number of the second special symbol is zero, the first special symbol is reserved. The number is also likely to be zero. Therefore, the fall of interest can be suppressed by lengthening the fluctuation time when the number of reserved special symbols is zero. In all of the variation numbers 4, 5, 6 and 7, after starting the variation of the decorative design displayed on the effect image display device 115, the reach design is not accompanied by the reach effect, and the decorative design is changed to a short hit. The stop display is performed in a manner different from both winning and small winning.

  In the present embodiment, “immediately after the start of variation” means immediately after the first special symbol counter or the second special symbol counter is subtracted in the variation start process (step S130).

[In-flight processing]
Next, the changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. In the changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S1801). That is, it is determined whether either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is changing. If it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1801), the changing process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that the special symbol is changing (YES in step S1801), the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the variable time has ended. That is, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer has elapsed in the variation pattern setting process. If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S1802), the changing process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S1802), the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S1803). That is, the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 (both see FIG. 25) in the changing display of the first special symbol indicator 84 or the second special symbol indicator 86. The result is derived and displayed, and a change stop command is output to the peripheral control board 610.

  When the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S1803), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S1804). That is, as a result of the fact that the current fluctuation is stopped and the lottery result is derived, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is started. If it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “3” (step S1805), and the changing process is terminated. If it is determined that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1804), it is next determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1806). That is, it is determined whether or not the small hit game is started as a result of the current fluctuation being stopped and the lottery result being derived. If it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “4” (step S1807), and the changing process is terminated. If it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S1808), and the changing process is terminated.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, an example of the jackpot game start process will be described based on FIG. In this jackpot game start process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation (step S2001). Specifically, whether or not the probability variation game execution means 734 controls the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714, that is, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 704. It is determined whether or not the determination of success / failure by the symbol success / failure determination means 714 (see FIG. 25 for both) is made based on the special symbol probability change time determination table 708. If it is determined that the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S2001), the operation of the probability variation function is stopped (step S2002), and the process proceeds to step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation function is not in operation (NO in step S2001), the process directly proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is operating. Specifically, whether or not the short-time game execution means 736 controls the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 (both see FIG. 25), that is, whether or not the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 determines whether or not the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 It is determined whether or not to make a determination based on the determination table. If it is determined that the time reduction function is in operation (YES in step S2003), the operation of the time reduction function is stopped (step S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving function is not operating (NO in step S2003), the process directly proceeds to step S2005.

  In step S2005, it is determined whether or not it is a long hit. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the long hit flag is ON, and if it is ON, it is determined that the long hit flag is ON. If it is determined that the length is long (YES in step S2005), the number of rounds per long, the opening time per round, the limit number, and the opening / closing device to be opened are set. Specifically, the number of rounds is set to 15 rounds, for example, the opening time per round is set to 30 seconds, the limited number is set to 9 pieces, and the opening / closing device to be opened is for production in the first round and the second round, for example. The opening / closing device 398 is set, the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is set for the 3rd to 14th rounds, and the effect opening / closing device 398 (see FIG. 10) is set for the 15th round. If it is determined not to be a long hit, the number of short hit rounds, the opening time per round, the limit number are set, and the opening / closing device to be opened is set. Specifically, the number of rounds is set to, for example, 2 rounds, the opening time per round is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds, the limited number is set to, for example, 3, and the opening / closing device to be opened is set to the effect opening / closing device 398, for example. .

  When the number of rounds, the opening time per round, the limit number, and the opening / closing device to be opened are set in either step S2006 or step S2007, the processing flag is updated to “5” (step S2008), and the jackpot game starts The process ends.

[Small hit game start processing]
Next, an example of the small hit game start process will be described with reference to FIG. In the small hit game starting process, first, the number of small hits released, the opening time per time, the limit number, and the opening device to be opened are set (step S2201). Specifically, the number of times of opening is set to, for example, 2 times, the opening time per time is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds, the limit number is set to, for example, 3 and the opening device to be opened is set to the effect opening / closing device 398. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “6” and the small hit game start process is terminated.

[Special electric utility jackpot control processing]
Next, an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the special electric utility jackpot control process, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing device 397 is open (step S2401). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the effect opening / closing device 398 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is open. If it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 is open (YES in step S2401), then whether or not the opening time of the predetermined opening / closing device 397 (the effect opening / closing device 398 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400) has elapsed. Is determined (step S2402). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time set in the jackpot game start process has been reached. If it is determined that the opening time of the switchgear 397 has elapsed (YES in step S2402), the switchgear 397 is closed (step S2404), and the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2402 that the opening time of the opening / closing device 397 has not elapsed (NO in step S2402), it is determined whether a predetermined limited number of game balls have been received by the opening / closing device 397 (step S2403). . Specifically, the limited number of game balls set in the jackpot game start process are the opening / closing device 397 in which the opening operation is executed (when the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is being executed, the opening / closing device for the effect) 398, when the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is being executed, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 has been accepted. If it is determined that a limited number of game balls have been received by the opening / closing device 397 that is performing the opening operation (YES in step S2403), the opening / closing device 397 is closed (step S2404), and the special electric accessory big hit control process is performed. finish. If it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 has not received a limited number of game balls (NO in step S2403), the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that the opening / closing device 397 is not open (NO in step S2401), it is determined whether or not a predetermined number of rounds has been reached (step S2405). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds set in the jackpot game start process has been reached. If it is determined that the predetermined number of rounds has not been reached (NO in step S2405), a predetermined opening device is opened among effect opening / closing device 398 and jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 (step S2406). The special electric utility jackpot control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2405 that the predetermined number of rounds has been reached (YES in step S2405), the jackpot flag is turned off (step S2407), and it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is accompanied by a probability fluctuation ( Step S2408). Specifically, when it is determined that the result determined using the design random number is a probability variation, it is determined that the probability variation is accompanied. If it is determined that the jackpot is accompanied by a probability fluctuation (YES in step S2408), the probability fluctuation function is activated (step S2409), and then it is determined whether the jackpot is a long hit. Specifically, if the long hit flag is ON, it is determined that the long hit is reached. If it is determined that it is a long hit (YES in step S2410), the long hit flag is turned off (step S2411), then the time reduction function is activated (step S2412), and the process proceeds to step S2418.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that it is not long hit (NO in step S2410), the short hit flag is turned off (step S2413), and then it is determined whether or not the winning operation is in the short-time function operation (step S2414). In other words, if it is a short hit, the short hit flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S2414 to determine whether or not the short time function is operating. If it is determined that the winning function is in operation (YES in step S2414), the operation of the shortening function is started (step S2412), and the process proceeds to step S2418.

  Returning to step S2408, if it is determined that the jackpot is not accompanied by probability fluctuation (NO in step S2408), the long hit flag is turned off (step S2415), the operation of the time reduction function is started (step S2416), and the time reduction function is activated. The prescribed number of operations (for example, 100 times) is set (step S2417), and the process proceeds to step S2418.

  In step S2418, the processing flag is updated to “0”, and the special symbol electric accessory big hit control processing is terminated. The special electric accessory is a concept including an effect opening / closing device 398, a jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, an effect opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 578, and a jackpot gaming opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 572.

[Special electric accessory small hit control processing]
Next, based on FIG. 62, an example of the special electric accessory small hit control process will be described. In this special electric accessory small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined limited number of game balls have been received by the opening / closing device 397 (step S2501). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a limited number (for example, three) of game balls set in the small hit game start process has been received by the opening / closing device 397. If it is determined that a limited number of game balls are not received by the opening / closing device 397 (NO in step S2501), it is determined whether the opening / closing device 397 is open (step S2502). If it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 is not open (NO in step S2502), a predetermined opening / closing device (for example, the opening / closing device for effect 398) is opened (step S2503) among the effect opening / closing device 398 and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400. ), The special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2502 that the opening / closing device 397 is open (YES in step S2502), it is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time of the opening / closing device (for example, the effect opening / closing device 398) has elapsed (step S2504). . Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time (for example, 0.3 seconds) set in the small hit game start process has elapsed. If it is determined that the opening time of the predetermined opening / closing device 397 has not elapsed (NO in step S2504), the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S2504 that the predetermined opening time of the opening / closing device 397 has elapsed (YES in step S2504), the opening / closing device 397 is closed (step S2505), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined number of times of opening has been reached. (Step S2506). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of times of opening / closing device 397 has reached the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) set in the small hit game start procedure. At this time, if it is determined that the predetermined number of times of opening has not been reached (NO in step S2506), the electric accessory small hit control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of times of opening / closing device 397 has reached a predetermined number of times of opening (YES in step S2506), the process proceeds to step S2509.

  Returning to step S2501, if it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 has received a limited number of game balls (YES in step S2501), it is determined whether the opening / closing device 397 is open (step S2507). If it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 is open (YES in step S2507), the opening / closing device 397 is closed (step S2508), and the process proceeds to step S2509. Returning to step S2507, if it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 is not open (NO in step S2507), the process directly proceeds to step S2509.

  In step S2509, the processing flag is updated to “0”, and the special electric accessory small hitting control process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the opening time of the switchgear is set to 0.3 seconds, for example. In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the maximum number of winnings (for example, 3) has been won in the switching device. The hit game ends. However, since the opening time of the switchgear in the small hit game is set so that it is extremely difficult to win the maximum number of winnings, in most cases the predetermined number of opening without winning the maximum winnings The opening / closing device is opened (for example, twice).

[About fluctuation time]
Next, based on FIG. 63, an example of the fluctuation time concerning the deviation fluctuation pattern when the time-shortening function is not operated will be described. FIG. 63 is a timing chart showing the variation time according to the unsuccessful variation pattern without the reach effect when the short-time function is not activated. FIG. 63A shows the variation time of the first special symbol when the number of reserved first symbol symbols is 0 or 1 (that is, the variation time for the normal variation of variation number 1). The variation time in this case is 11800 ms. FIG. 63 (B) shows the variation time of the first special symbol when the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is 2 (that is, the variation time in the case of the short variation 1 of the variation number 2). The variation time in this case is 6000 ms. FIG. 63C shows the variation time of the first special symbol when the number of reserved first symbol symbols is 3 (that is, the variation time in the case of the short variation 2 of the variation number 3). The variation time in this case is 2900 ms. From the above, in the case of a detachment that does not involve a reach effect when the time-shortening function is not activated, the variation time of the first special symbol becomes longer as the number of retained first special symbols is smaller. When the time-shortening function is not activated, it is more difficult for a game ball that is driven toward the game area 37 to win the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 than to win the first start port 390. When the number of reservations of the first special symbol becomes zero, the possibility that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is also zero is high. If both the hold of the first special symbol and the hold of the second special symbol become 0, neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is changed, and the interest is lowered. Therefore, in the case of a detachment that does not involve a reach effect when the time-shortening function is not activated, a decrease in interest can be suppressed by increasing the variation time of the first special symbol as the number of first special symbol reservations decreases.

  63D and 63E show the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the variation time in the case of the variation number 47 and the variation number 48). When the time-shortening function is not activated and the determination result by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is out of place, any of FIGS. 63 (D) and 63 (E), regardless of the number of second special symbols held. It will be the fluctuation time. Therefore, there is no correlation between the number of reserved special symbols and the variation time of the second special symbol, and the variation time of the second special symbol is determined regardless of the number of retained special symbols. In addition, when the determination result by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is out of the range (not long hit, short hit or small hit), the variation number 47 or the variation number 48 is selected, so that the reach variation is always performed. Is executed. In addition, since the pair of movable pieces 396 are closed when the time-shortening function is not activated, it is almost impossible for the game ball that has been driven toward the game area 37 to win the third starting port 394. In addition, since it is more difficult for a game ball to win the second start port 392 than to win a game ball to the first start port 390, the game ball that has been driven toward the game area 37 enters the second start port 392. By always changing the reach when winning a prize, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the winning to the second start port 392 and to suppress a decrease in interest. Note that the variation time in the case of FIG. 63D is 9500 ms, and the variation time in the case of FIG. 63E is 11300 ms.

  Next, based on FIG. 64, a description will be given of a variation time required for a deviation variation pattern without a reach effect at the time-shortening function operation. FIG. 64 is a timing chart showing the variation time according to the unsuccessful variation pattern without the reach effect when the short-time function is activated. FIG. 64A shows the variation time of the first special symbol (that is, the shortened variation 4 of the variation number 5) when the probability variation function is activated. The variation time in this case is 2200 ms. FIG. 64B shows the variation time of the second special symbol when the probability variation function is not activated (that is, the shortened variation 6 of the variation number 7). The variation time in this case is 2300 ms. Therefore, although the variation time of the first special symbol varies depending on whether the probability variation function is inactive or activated, there is a correlation between the number of reserved special symbols and the variation time of the first special symbol. Instead, it is determined regardless of the number of reserved first symbols.

  FIG. 64C shows the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the shortened variation 3 of the variation field number 4) when the probability variation function is activated and the number of the second special symbol hold is zero. . The variation time in this case is 4800 ms. FIG. 64 (D) shows the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the shortened variation 4 of the variation field No. 5) when the probability variation function is activated and the number of reserved second special symbols is 1 or more. Yes. The variation time in this case is 2200 ms. FIG. 64 (E) shows the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the shortened variation 5 of the variation field No. 6) when the probability changing function is not activated and the number of holdings of the second special symbol is zero. Yes. The variation time in this case is 5200 ms. FIG. 64 (F) shows the variation time of the second special symbol (that is, the shortened variation 6 of the variation field No. 7) when the probability changing function is not activated and the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is 1 or more. ing. The variation time in this case is 2300 ms. From the above, in the case of a departure without a reach effect at the time-shortening function operation, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes longer as the number of second special symbols held is smaller. More specifically, when the number of reserves of the second special symbol is 0, it becomes longer than when the number of reserves of the second special symbol is 1 or more. Since the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 396 is executed at the time-shortening function operation, the game ball that is driven toward the game area 37 is much easier than winning the first start port 390. It becomes possible to win 394. Therefore, when the number of reservations of the second special symbol becomes zero, there is a high possibility that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is also zero. If both the hold of the first special symbol and the hold of the second special symbol become 0, neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is changed, and the interest is lowered. Therefore, in the case of detachment without a reach effect at the time-shortening function operation, the variation time of the second special symbol when the second special symbol hold number is 0, and the second special symbol hold number is one or more By making it longer than the variation time of the second special symbol in, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Variation of decorative symbols displayed on effect image display device]
Next, based on FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, the fluctuation | variation aspect of the decoration design 1153 displayed on the effect image display apparatus 115 is demonstrated. The decorative symbols are composed of a plurality of symbol sequences. In this embodiment, the left symbol sequence 1153a displayed on the left side as viewed from the player, the middle symbol sequence 1153b displayed in the middle as viewed from the player, And, it is composed of three symbol rows of right symbol row 1153c displayed on the right side as viewed from the player.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of the decoration symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect image display device 115. FIG. 65 (A) shows the variation of the decoration symbol 1153. FIG. 65B is a diagram showing a mode before the start, FIG. 65B is a diagram showing a mode in which the decorative symbol 1153 is changing, and FIG. 65C is a diagram showing a mode after the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is stopped. As shown in FIG. 65 (B), the decorative symbol 1153 changes in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c in the vertical direction (more specifically, from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player). This is a scroll fluctuation that scrolls in the direction of heading. And it stops in order of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b.

  Note that FIG. 65 shows a mode of out-of-range fluctuation without reach production, but even in the case of out-of-range fluctuation and jackpot fluctuation with reach production, the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol Any of the columns 1153c scrolls in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, “displacement fluctuation without reach effect” refers to fluctuation of the decorative symbol 1153 when the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are stopped at different symbols. , “Deviation fluctuation with reach effect” means that the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are the same and only the stop symbol of the middle symbol row 1153b is different. The “big hit variation” is a variation of the decorative symbol 1153 when all of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b stop at the same symbol.

  Further, the variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect image display device 115 is scrolled in the vertical direction regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated. Scroll fluctuation.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of the decoration symbol 1153 when the lottery result is derived to the effect image display device 115 when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is out of place when the time-shortening function is not activated. 66A is a diagram showing a mode before the start of change of the decorative symbol 1153, FIG. 66B is a diagram showing a mode of the decorative symbol 1153 during change, and FIG. 66C is a reach. FIG. 66 (D) is a diagram showing a mode for notifying that there is a diagram, and FIG. 66 (D) is a diagram showing a mode after the decoration symbol 1153 stops changing. As shown in FIG. 66 (B), the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is such that the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are substantially at the same position as the stop position (the position shown in FIG. 66 (A)) before the change starts. While rotating, the front and back surfaces are alternately displayed while staying, and the middle symbol row 1153b is scroll fluctuation that scrolls in the vertical direction as in the mode shown in FIG. 65 (B). Then, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c stop rotating almost simultaneously, and then the middle symbol row 1153b stops. In this case, the stop symbol in the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol in the right symbol row 1153c are always the same symbol, and a variation with a reach effect is performed.

  Here, when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the effect image display device 115 when the short-time function is activated, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 is produced by the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700. The variation pattern of the decorative pattern 1153 when derived to the image display device 115 is substantially the same. That is, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is a scroll variation in which all of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c are scrolled in the vertical direction (more specifically, from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player). It is. And it stops in order of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b.

  As described above, if the time-shortening function is not activated, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect image display device 115 and the second special symbol lottery means 710. The variation pattern of the decorative design 1153 when the lottery result is derived to the effect image display device 115 is different. On the other hand, if the time reduction function is activated, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect image display device 115 and the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710. The variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the result is derived to the effect image display device 115 is substantially the same.

  Further, as described above, the information indicating that the second special symbol hold counter 713 holds the information when the time-shortening function is not operated is displayed in the second display mode (the mode in which the character is displayed) in the hold display area 1150. The On the other hand, the information indicating that the second special symbol hold counter 713 is on hold at the time-shortening function operation is the third mode indicating that the second special symbol hold counter 703 is on hold (that is, the character display disappears). Display in the same mode as the above mode).

  From the above, if the time reduction function is not activated, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect image display device 115 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is the effect image display device. The variation pattern of the decorative design 1153 differs depending on the case of being derived to 115. Also, a display mode of information indicating that the information is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 displayed in the hold display area 1150 and a second special symbol hold counter 713 displayed in the hold display area 1150 It is also different from the display mode of information indicating that it is present. On the other hand, when the short-time function is activated, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect image display device 115 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is output to the effect image display device 115. In the derived case, the display mode of the information indicating that the decoration pattern 1153 is changed and the special symbol hold counters 703 and 713 displayed in the hold display area 1150 are held are substantially the same.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result is derived to the effect image display device 115 when the lottery result by the special symbol lottery means 700 and 710 is short hit or small hit. . That is, when the lottery result is a short hit or a small hit, both the same lots are drawn in the same table 13 regardless of whether the lottery is by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 Since it is selected, the same variation mode is performed.

  67 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect before the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 1153, FIGS. 67 (B) to (G) are diagrams showing aspects of the decorative symbol 1153 during fluctuation, and FIG. 67 (H) is It is a figure which shows the aspect after the fluctuation | variation stop of the decoration design 1153. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (B), the decoration symbol 1153 changes in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c in the vertical direction (more specifically, from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player). This is a scroll fluctuation that scrolls in the direction of heading. As shown in FIG. 67D, after the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are displayed larger than the display of the middle symbol row 1153b, the wife runs and stops in the left symbol row 1153a (see FIG. 67). 67 (E)), then the wife runs to the right symbol row 1153c (see FIG. 67 (F)) and stops (FIG. 67 (G)). As shown in FIG. 67 (G), the “song” symbol is stopped on the left symbol row 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped on the right symbol row 1153c, and only the middle symbol row 1153b is scrolled vertically. The aspect to do is reach variation that may be won per short or small. As shown in FIG. 67 (H), when the “legend” symbol stops in the middle symbol row 1153b, a short hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state occurs.

  Next, based on FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, the fluctuation | variation aspect of the decoration design 1153 is demonstrated. FIG. 68 is a functional block diagram mainly showing a function related to display mode determination in the functional configuration of the main control board 510. FIG. 69 is a time chart showing the display modes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 68, when a game ball wins the first start port 390 and is detected by the first start port sensor 580, the first special symbol lottery means 700 performs the lottery as described above. Specifically, when the game ball wins the first start port 390, the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the first special symbol determination determination random number extracting means 702, and the acquired random number value and the determination table for the determination of success / failure (special symbol normal) Based on the hourly determination table 706 or the special symbol probability changing time determination table 708), the first special symbol determination unit 704 determines whether or not the first special symbol is correct.

  Further, the main control board 510 has first display mode determining means 772 and second display mode determining means 778. The first display mode determination unit 772 has a plurality of display modes stored in the display mode storage unit 770 as display modes derived to the effect image display device 115 by the first special symbol image display control unit 614 (see FIG. 29). Select and decide from among them. The second display mode determination means 778 has a plurality of display modes stored in the display mode storage means 770 for the display mode derived to the effect image display device 115 by the second special symbol image display control means 615 (see FIG. 29). Select and decide from among them.

  Then, based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination unit 704 or the second special symbol determination unit 714, any one of the plurality of display modes stored in the display mode storage unit 770 is displayed. The selection is determined, and the command transmission means 746 transmits a command to the peripheral control board 610. The peripheral control board 610 that has received the command controls display of the display mode selected and determined by the effect image display control means 616 on the effect image display device 115.

  Specifically, the 1st display mode determination means 772 judges whether the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means 700 is winning. On the other hand, the 2nd display mode determination means 778 judges whether the lottery by the 2nd special symbol lottery means 710 is winning.

  The first display mode determination unit 772 includes a long reach out-of-range display mode selection determination unit 774 and a win display mode selection determination unit 776. The second display mode determining unit 778 includes a short reach off special display mode selection determining unit 780 and a hit special display mode selection determining unit 782.

  The first display mode determination unit 772 includes a long reach out-of-range display mode selection determination unit 774 and a win display mode selection determination unit 776. The long reach miss display mode selection determination means 774 displays the long reach miss display mode in a lottery that is different from the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery means 700 and that the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is missed. Only when it is selected and determined to be performed, any one of the two or more long-reach out-of-display modes is further selected and determined. In addition, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is a winning, the winning display manner selection determining means 776 selects and determines one of the two or more winning display modes.

  The second display mode determining unit 778 includes a short reach off special display mode selection determining unit 780 and a hit special display mode selection determining unit 782. The short reach out special display mode selection determining unit 780 selects one of the reach out special display modes out of two or more short reach out special modes when the lottery by the second special symbol lottery unit 710 is out of place. decide. When the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a win, the hit special display mode selection determining unit 782 selects and determines one of the hit special display modes from two or more hit special display modes.

  On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is performed as described above. Specifically, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the second special symbol determination random number extraction means 712, and the acquired random number value and the determination of success / failure are obtained. Based on the table (special symbol normal time determination table 706 or special symbol probability change time determination table 708), the second special symbol determination unit 714 determines whether or not the second special symbol is correct. Based on the determination result of the second special symbol determination unit 714, the display mode storage unit 770 selects and determines one of the display modes, and the command transmission unit 746 selects the display mode. A command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 610. The peripheral control board 610 that has received the command controls display of the display mode selected and determined by the effect image display control means 616 on the effect image display device 115.

  The lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived by the first special symbol image display control means 614 to the common symbol display area 115c (see FIG. 27). The lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c by the second special symbol image display control means 615. Note that the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 are all of the tables 1 to 33 stored in the display mode storage means 770 in the common symbol display area 115c. It is derived after the decorative design 1153 is variably displayed based on one of the tables.

  The display mode of the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 for deriving the lottery result based on the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “the variation of the first special symbol”) includes a win display mode, a long reach off display mode, and a short reach off. There are display modes and out-of-display modes. Each of these display modes has a plurality of patterns, all of which are stored in any of the tables 1 to 33 of the display mode storage unit 770.

  The win display mode is a display mode that is selected and determined only when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is win, and as shown in Tables 1 to 6 (see FIG. 45), the display mode of 6 patterns Is remembered. As shown in FIG. 69, the winning display mode is composed of a symbol variation period and a long reach variation period.

  In the variation of the first special symbol, the variation of all the three decorative symbols 1153 is started, and the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped and displayed in this order. The symbol variation period means a period from the start of variation for all three decorative symbols 1153 to when the right symbol stops (that is, until the variation of only the middle symbol that is the final stop symbol). The long-term fluctuation period is a long reach (generally referred to as super reach) that gives the player the expectation of winning a long win when reaching reach after the end of the symbol fluctuation period. This is a period during which the middle symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Note that the number of decorative symbols 1153 is not limited to three. For example, if there are a plurality of decorative symbols 1153, the variable display of N symbols (N is 2 or more) among the plurality of decorative symbols 1153 is started. The symbol variation period is the period until (N-1) symbols out of N symbols are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in FIG. 69, “left” means a stop display of the left symbol, “right” means a stop display of the right symbol, and “middle” means a stop display of the middle symbol.

  The long reach off display mode is a mode in which selection is determined when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is off, and a plurality of display patterns are displayed as shown in Tables 19 to 21 (see FIG. 53). It is stored in the mode storage means 770. Each of these display patterns corresponds to the display pattern in the win display mode. For example, in the table 1 (see FIG. 45) in which the winning display mode is selected and determined, “Song reach C (via song reach A) length” of the variation number 16 is stored, and the long reach out-of-display mode is selected and determined In the table 19 (see FIG. 53), “variation per song reach C (via song reach A)” of the variation number 17 corresponding to the variation number 16 is stored.

  The long reach out-of-range display mode is a display mode that closely resembles the corresponding hit display mode over time. Specifically, it has a symbol variation period substantially the same as the winning display mode and a long reach variation period substantially the same as the winning display mode. Accordingly, the long reach out-of-range display mode is very similar to the hit display mode over time. In this way, the long reach out-of-range display mode is made to be a display mode that closely resembles the winning display mode over time, so that the player can be selected by the first special symbol lottery means 700 until the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that it may have been won, and to suppress the decline in interest.

  Note that “similar in time” means that not only the variation mode displayed on the effect image display device 115 but also the temporal display mode is very similar. In other words, it means that the display mode after the elapse of x seconds is substantially the same. “Extremely similar” means that the player cannot recognize the difference from the viewpoint of the player, and is a concept including “same”.

  The short reach out display mode is a mode that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is out, and a display mode that resembles a part of the long reach out display mode over time. Have. Specifically, the short reach out display mode includes a symbol variation period that is substantially the same as the symbol variation period that is a part of the win display mode and the long reach display mode, and a long reach variation period that is a part of the long reach display mode. And a long reach variation period that is very similar over time.

  The out-of-display mode is a display mode that closely resembles the symbol variation period as a part of the short reach out-of-display mode.

  In addition, the display mode of the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “the variation of the second special symbol”) includes a hit special display mode and a long reach off special display mode. And there is a special display mode out of short reach. Each of these display modes has a plurality of patterns, all of which are stored in any of the tables 1 to 33 of the display mode storage unit 770.

  The win special display mode is a display mode that is selected and determined only when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a win, as shown in Tables 7 to 12 (see FIG. 47). Aspect is stored. The winning display mode is composed of a symbol variation short period and a long reach variation period.

  In the variation of the second special symbol, among the three decorative symbols 1153, the left symbol and the right symbol perform a rotational variation different from the scroll variation in the first special symbol, and the middle symbol performs a scroll variation. Then, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed almost simultaneously, and then the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The symbol variation short period is a period from the start of variation for all three decorative symbols 1153 until the left symbol and the right symbol stop (that is, until the variation of only the middle symbol that is the final stop symbol). means. This symbol variation short period is a variation in which the variation time is shorter than the symbol variation period in the variation of the first special symbol. The long reach variation period is a variation period that is very similar to the long reach variation period in the variation of the first special symbol. The effect during the long reach variation period is memorable for the player because the player has a sense of expectation that a jackpot game may occur. Thereby, a hit special display mode turns into a display mode very similar to a hit display mode of the 1st special symbol for a player. The change time of the hit special display mode is the same as the long reach change period in the change period of the hit special display mode and the long reach change period in the hit display mode, while the time in the short pattern change period Since it is shorter than the time in the period, it is shorter than the fluctuation time of the hit display mode.

  The long reach off special display mode is a mode that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is off, and there are a plurality of display patterns as shown in Tables 22 to 24 (see FIG. 56). It is stored in the display mode storage unit 770. Each of these display patterns corresponds to the display pattern in the hit special display mode. For example, in the table 7 (see FIG. 47) in which the hit special display mode is selected and determined, the variable number 53 “per song reach B (via song reach A)” is stored, and the long reach off special display mode is selected. In the table 22 to be determined, “song reach B (via song reach A) off” of the variation number 52 corresponding to the variation number 53 is stored.

  Also, the long reach off special display mode consists of a display mode that closely resembles the corresponding hit special display mode over time. Specifically, the long reach off special display mode has the same symbol variation short period as the hit special display mode and the long reach change period substantially the same as the hit special display mode. Thereby, the long reach off special display mode is very similar to the hit special display mode over time. In this way, by setting the long reach off special display mode to a display mode that closely resembles the hit special display mode over time, the first special symbol lottery means 700 is used by the player until the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that the lottery has been won, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that “similar in time” means that not only the variation mode displayed on the effect image display device 115 but also the temporal display mode is very similar. In other words, it means that the display mode after the elapse of x seconds is substantially the same. “Extremely similar” means that the player cannot recognize the difference from the viewpoint of the player, and is a concept including “same”.

  The short reach off special display mode is a mode that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is off, and there are a plurality of display patterns as shown in Tables 22 to 24 (see FIG. 56). It is stored in the display mode storage unit 770. Each of these display patterns corresponds to a hit special display mode. For example, in the table 7 (see FIG. 47) in which the winning special display mode is selected and determined, “normal hit” of the variation number 49 is stored, and the table 22 (see FIG. 56) in which the special display mode out of short reach is selected and determined. In the reference), the “normal deviation (one symbol before)” of the variation number 47 corresponding to the variation number 49 and the “normal deviation (after one symbol)” of the variation number 48 are stored.

  Further, the short reach off special display mode has a display mode that is very similar to a part of the corresponding hit special display mode over time. Specifically, it has a symbol change short period of the hit special display mode and a short reach change period of the short reach off-change period of the first special symbol. In addition, the variation time of the short reach out special display mode is substantially the same as the variation time of the first special symbol out display mode. Thereby, reach can be generated without lengthening the fluctuation time. That is, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, reach is always generated if the time-shortening function is not activated. Normally, when a reach occurs, it will be longer than the fluctuation time when the reach does not occur. Therefore, when reach is generated each time the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 when the time is not activated, the fluctuation time becomes long, the progress of the game is slowed, and the interest is lowered. Therefore, when the short reach out special display mode is displayed as the second special symbol display mode when the time is not activated, the variation time is substantially the same as the variation time of the out display mode as the first special symbol display mode. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to slow progress of the game.

  In addition, the short reach variation period of the short reach out-of-display mode of the first special symbol and the short reach variation period of the short reach out of the special display mode are substantially the same with time. The variation time of the short reach variation display mode of the first special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol variation variation display mode by the time required for the short reach variation period. Therefore, the variation time of the entire short reach off special display mode is shorter than the variation time of the short reach off display mode of the first special symbol by the time required for the short reach variation period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 in the short time special display mode of the second special symbol is the variation pattern of the decorative pattern 1153 in the short time. This is clearly different from the variation of the decorative pattern 1153 in the display. Therefore, in the case of the short reach off special display mode, the player can grasp that the variation display of the decorative symbol 1153 starts and at the same time the variation of the second special symbol. Thus, in the case of the out-of-display mode, the short reach out-of-display mode, and the long reach out-of-display mode, it cannot be grasped that the mode is out during the fluctuation, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  That is, the occurrence of reach can also be achieved by setting the variation time in a display mode in which reach occurs (for example, short reach out-of-display mode) and the variation time in a display mode in which reach does not occur (eg, out-of-line display mode) to substantially the same time. It can suppress that the progress of the game by becomes slow. However, in such a case, in the display mode in which the reach occurs, if the reach does not occur even after the time that the reach should occur, the reach no longer occurs (that is, a big hit). It will be understood during the change, and the interest will be reduced. Therefore, in addition to the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 performed by winning the first starting opening 390, a lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 that always generates a reach at a predetermined time is provided. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the fact that it is understood during the fluctuation that no reach will occur. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the manner of variation in the symbol variation period of the first special symbol and the manner of variation in the symbol variation short period of the second special symbol are clearly different, so that no reach will occur. It is possible to suppress remarkably during the fluctuation.

  It should be noted that the display mode related to the fluctuation when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is short hit or small hit is related to the fluctuation when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is short hit or small hit. The variation mode is the same as the display mode.

  Thus, the gaming machine of the present embodiment described above has the following configuration. The following configurations 1 to 13 are provided alone or in appropriate combination.

[Configuration 1]
A game board in which a game area is formed and a game medium is driven toward the game area;
A first start port capable of accepting a game medium driven toward the game area;
A first game mode display means arranged in a game area of the game board and displaying a predetermined game mode;
A first game information display means arranged in the game area of the game board and displaying predetermined game information;
A first start detecting means for detecting that the game medium driven toward the game area is received by the first start opening; a first lottery for performing a lottery in response to detection of the game medium by the first start detecting means; A first game mode display control unit for displaying in a predetermined mode on the first game mode display unit and deriving a lottery result by the first lottery unit; and a lottery result by the first lottery unit A first hold means for holding the first game state display means by the first game state display control means within a first predetermined number of ranges, and the hold number information held by the first hold means; The first game information display control means for displaying in the first game information display means, and a plurality of display modes derived to the first game mode display means by the first game mode display control means are stored. The display mode derived to the first game mode display unit by the game display mode storage unit and the first game mode display control unit is selected and determined from among the plurality of display modes stored in the game display mode storage unit. First display mode determining means for performing, and at least a special game executing means for executing a special game capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player in response to winning the lottery by the first lottery means. 1 game control means, comprising:
The game display mode storage means includes
Two or more winning display modes that are selected and determined only when the lottery result by the first lottery means is winning;
A display that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the first lottery means is out, corresponds to any one of the two or more winning display modes, and closely resembles the corresponding winning display mode over time Two or more unreachable display modes comprising modes;
It is displayed when the lottery result is out, and stores at least at least one out-of-reach display mode that is similar to the part of the reach out-of-display mode over time
The first display mode determination means selects and determines to perform display in the reach out-of-display mode in a lottery that is different from the lottery result by the first lottery means and the lottery result by the first lottery means is off. And only when there is a reach out-of-reach display mode selection determining means for selecting and determining a predetermined out-of-reach display mode from among the two or more out-of-reach display modes.
The gaming machine further includes
A second start port capable of accepting a game medium driven toward the game area;
A second game mode display means arranged in a game area of the game board and displaying a predetermined game mode;
A second game information display means arranged in the game area of the game board and displaying predetermined game information;
A second start detecting means for detecting that the game medium driven toward the game area is received by the second start opening; a second lottery for performing a lottery in response to detection of the game medium by the second start detecting means; A second game mode display control unit for displaying a predetermined mode in the second game mode display unit and deriving a lottery result by the second lottery unit; and a lottery result by the second lottery unit in the second mode. A second hold means for holding the second game state display means by the second game state display control means within a second predetermined number of ranges, and the hold number information held by the second hold means A second game information display control means for displaying in the second game information display means, and a display mode derived to the first game mode display means by the second game mode display control means, Second game control means having second display mode decision means for selecting determined from among the plurality of display modes that are stored in the serial game display mode storage means, at least provided with a,
The special game state generation means executes a special game that allows a player to be given a predetermined game value in response to winning the lottery by the second lottery means,
The game display mode storage means includes
Storing a plurality of display modes derived by the second game mode display control unit to the second game mode display unit;
It is a display mode that is very similar to the winning display mode and has a shorter display time than the winning display mode, and is selected and determined only when the lottery result by the second lottery means is at least A special aspect,
A portion that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the second lottery means is out of order, corresponds to at least the two or more hit special display modes, and closely resembles a part of the corresponding hit special display mode over time And two or more reach-off special display modes that are clearly different from the display mode.
The second display mode determining means, when the lottery result by the second lottery means is out, selects and determines a predetermined reach out special display mode from among the two or more reach out special display modes. It has an aspect selection determination means.

According to this, on the game board 5, the first start port 390, the first game mode display means (common symbol display area 115c), the first game information display means (hold display area 1150), the first 1 game control means (main control board 510, peripheral control board 610 and display device control board 116). The first game control means includes first start detection means (step S1104), first lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700), and first game mode display control means (first special symbol image display control means). 614), first hold means (first special symbol hold counter 703 or first special symbol hold number storage means 628), first game information display control means (first hold information image display control means 6202), First display mode determining means 772, game display mode storage means, and special game execution means (big hit game execution means 515) are included. When the game medium is received at the first start port 390, it is detected by the first start detection means (step S1104), and the lottery is performed by the first lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700) accordingly. The lottery result by the first lottery means is displayed in a predetermined manner in the first game information display area by the first game state display control means (first special symbol image display control means 614). The display of the lottery result by the first lottery means in the first game information display area is a first predetermined number range by the first holding means (the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the first special symbol holding number storage means 628). Is held in The number-of-holds information held by the first holding means is displayed on the first game information display means by the first game information display control means (first hold information image display control means 6202). The display mode derived in the first game mode display area is selected and determined by the first display mode determination unit 772 from among a plurality of display modes stored in the game display mode storage unit (display mode storage unit 770). . In addition, when the lottery by the first lottery means is won, a special game (a jackpot game) that can give a predetermined game value to the player is executed by the special game executing means (a jackpot game executing means 515). Further, the game board 5 includes a second start port (second start port 392 or third start port 394), second game control means (main control board 510, peripheral control board 610, and display device control board 116). , Is provided.
The second game control means includes second start detection means (step S1101), second lottery means (second special symbol lottery means 710), and second game mode display control means (second special symbol image display control means). 615), second hold means (second special symbol hold counter 713 or second special symbol hold number storage means 630), second game information display control means (first hold information image display control means 6203), Second display mode determination means 778. When the game medium is received at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, it is detected by the second start detecting means (step S1101), and the lottery is performed by the second lottery means (second special symbol lottery means 710) accordingly. Done. The lottery result by the second lottery means is displayed in a predetermined manner in the second game information display area by the second game state display control means (second special symbol image display control means 615). The display of the lottery result by the second lottery means in the second game information display area is made within the second predetermined number range by the second holding means (the second special symbol holding counter 713 or the second special symbol holding number storage means 630). Is held in The number-of-holds information held by the second holding means is displayed in the second game information display area by the second game information display control means (second hold information image display control means 6203). The game display mode storage unit 770 stores a plurality of display modes derived by the second game information display control unit 504 to the second game information display area. The display mode derived in the second game mode display area is selected and determined by the second display mode determination unit 778 from among a plurality of display modes stored in the game display mode storage unit (display mode storage unit 770). . The special game executing means also executes the special game (big hit game) in response to winning the lottery by the second lottery means. The game display mode storage means 770 includes two or more hit display modes, two or more reach miss display modes, a miss display mode, two or more hit special display modes, and two or more reach miss special display modes. I remember it. The winning display mode is selected and determined only when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is winning. The reach out display mode is selected when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is out, and corresponds to any one of the two or more hit display modes, and the corresponding win display mode and time The display mode is very similar to the above. The outlier display mode is displayed when the lottery result is out of date, and resembles a part of the reach outlier display mode over time. The win special display mode is a display mode that is very similar to the win display mode and shorter in display time than the win display mode, and is selected only when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is win. It is determined. The reach out special display mode is selected and determined when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is out, and corresponds to at least two or more hit special display modes. It includes a part that resembles the part over time. Further, the display mode is clearly different from the out-of-display mode. Only when the result of the lottery by the first lottery means is out of order and when it is selected and decided to display in the lottery different from the lottery by the first lottery means, the display of the two or more reach out is displayed. Further, a predetermined out-of-reach display mode is selected and determined from the out-of-reach display mode selection determining unit (long reach out-of-line display mode selection determining unit 774). Further, when the lottery result by the second lottery means is out of the range, the display by the predetermined reach out special display mode is performed among the two or more reach out special display modes. Reach out special display mode selection determining means 780) selects and determines.

  Accordingly, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is out of reach, the reach effect is performed only when the reach out display mode is selected and determined by the lottery, while the second special symbol lottery means 710. If the lottery is not successful, the reach effect is performed without performing the lottery. Thereby, since it can be interested in reach production, the fall of interest can be controlled.

  In addition, since the reach effect is performed when the game medium wins the second start opening 392, the generation of the reach effect is not left to the gaming machine as in the conventional gaming machine. That is, unlike conventional gaming machines, there is no correlation between the frequency of reach and the expectation that a special game will occur. On the contrary, since the player can feel that he / she can generate reach himself / herself, he / she can be interested in reach production and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the reach-removed special display mode selected and determined when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is out is selected and determined only when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is winning. Corresponds to the hit special mode. Moreover, it is very similar over time to a part of the hit special display mode. Thereby, when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived, it is possible to always have a sense of expectation of occurrence of a special game, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the reach out special display mode is clearly different from the out display mode. Therefore, when the reach out special display mode is displayed, it is not the out display mode, that is, the reach out special display mode. Since it can be grasped that any one of the reach effects is included, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Configuration 2]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 1,
The second game mode display unit is a common symbol display unit that also serves as the first game mode display unit, and the common symbol display unit includes a lottery result by the first lottery unit and the second lottery unit. The one lottery result among the lottery results by is derived by a common symbol group consisting of a plurality of symbols,
The second game information display means is a hold display means that also serves as the second game information display means, and the hold display means includes hold related information relating to the first hold means and the second hold means. It is one hold display means that can display both,
A merged hold display control means for recognizing the hold-related information relating to the first hold means and the second hold means so as to be recognizable on the hold display means;
The merge hold display control means can recognize the derivation order derived to the common symbol display means when both the number of holds by the first hold means and the number of holds by the second hold means are 1 or more. And a merge pending order display control means.

  According to this, in the common symbol display means (common symbol display area 115c), the lottery result by the first lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700) and the second lottery means (second special symbol lottery means 710). Any one lottery result among the lottery results is derived by a symbol group composed of a plurality of symbols. That is, the symbol group functions as a common symbol from which the lottery result by the first lottery means and the lottery result by the second lottery means can be derived. In the hold display area 1151, hold-related information and second hold means (second special symbol hold counter 713) related to the first hold means (first special symbol hold counter 703 or first special symbol hold number storage means 628) are displayed. Alternatively, both of the hold-related information relating to the second special symbol hold count storage means 630) are recognizablely displayed by the merge hold display control means 620. When both of the number of holds by the first holding means and the second holding means are 1 or more, the derivation order derived to the common symbol display means is the merge hold order display control means (merge hold order image display control means 6205). Is displayed in a recognizable manner.

  That is, the first lottery means includes the first lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700) and second lottery means (second special symbol lottery means 710). Since either one of the lottery result and the lottery result by the second lottery means is derived to the common symbol display means (common symbol display area 115c), both the lottery result by the first lottery means and the lottery result by the second lottery means There is no complication as in the case of the derivation, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the lottery result by the first lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700) and the lottery result by the second lottery means (second special symbol lottery means 710) are common symbol display means (common symbol display area 115c) as common symbols. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an unpleasant feeling that the fluctuation of the other one is stopped while the lottery result by the first lottery means and the lottery result by the second lottery means are derived one by one. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, one of the results corresponding to the lottery result by the first lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700) and the lottery result by the second lottery means (second special symbol lottery means 710) is used as a common symbol. When derived and displayed on the display means (common symbol display area 115c), the player is interested in which lottery means the lottery result is derived from. This is because, when the lottery result by the second lottery means is derived, the reach effect is always performed. Therefore, when both the number of holdings by the first holding unit 428 and the number of holdings by the second holding unit 430 are 1 or more, the derivation order derived in the symbol display area 115c is displayed in a recognizable manner. Reduction can be suppressed.

  The “holding related information” is, for example, the first holding means (the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the first special symbol holding number storage means 628) or the second holding means (the second special symbol holding counter 713 or the first holding information). 2 special symbol hold number storage means 630) hold number information indicating the number held, hold information indicating that the first hold means or the second hold means can hold, and hold by the first hold means The lottery result based on the above and the lottery result based on the hold by the second holding means correspond to the hold derivation order indicating the order in which the common symbol display means (common symbol display area 115c) is derived.

[Configuration 3]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 2,
The first display mode indicating that the merge hold order display control means is held by the first hold means and the second display mode indicating that the merge hold order display control means are held by the second hold means, The on-hold display means displays the data in a line in the order in which they are held by the first hold means and the second hold means.

  According to this, the first display means and the second holding means (second special holding means (second special symbol holding counter 703 or the first special symbol holding number storage means 628) indicating that it is held by the first holding means (first special symbol hold counter 703 or first special symbol hold number storage means 628) The second display mode indicating that the symbol is held by the symbol hold counter 713 or the second special symbol hold number storage means 630 is in the order in which the second display mode is held by the first hold means and the second hold means (that is, the first start) In the order in which the detection means (step S1104) or the second start detection means (step S1101) detects that the game ball has been received by the first start port 390, the second start port 392, or the third start port 394), hold The data are displayed in a line on the display means (holding display area 1150).

  Accordingly, since the lottery results are derived in the common symbol display means (common symbol display area 115c) in the order of the display modes arranged in a line, the order of the lottery results derived to the common symbol display means can be determined at a glance. Easy to grasp. As a result, the player can concentrate on the game (for example, concentrating on the process in which the game balls are won at the start openings 390, 392, 394 or the lottery results are derived on the common symbol display means). Yes), and can suppress the decrease in interest.

[Configuration 4]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 2 or Configuration 3,
The merge hold display control means has a first predetermined number and a second predetermined number of predetermined predetermined numbers for the holdable information which is one of the hold related information. It has a holdable information display control means for displaying on the hold display means only that the first hold means can hold up to the first predetermined number even though it can be held to the upper limit. To do.

  According to this, with respect to the holdable information that is one of the hold related information, the first hold means can hold despite the fact that both the first hold means and the second hold means can still hold. Is displayed in the hold display area 1150 by the holdable information display control means 6201.

  As is well known, gaming machines equipped with a holding means are designed so that the average number of holds becomes a predetermined number, and this average number of holds is generally designed to be about two. The “average number of holds” is the average number of holds held by the holding means during the game. That is, if the average number of holds is two, for example, it means that the average number of holds held by the holding means during the game is two.

  However, the first holding means (first special symbol holding counter 703 or first special symbol holding number storage means 628) and second holding means (second special symbol holding counter 713 or second special symbol holding number storage means 630) are provided. Even if the upper limit of the number of possible holdings by the first holding unit and the second holding unit is increased, the number of holdings by the first holding unit and the second holding unit is increased by the first holding unit and the second holding unit. It is rare to be held up to the upper limit that can be held. That is, even if the upper limit of the holdable number increases, if the average hold number is the same as the conventional case, the first hold means and the second hold means rarely hold the upper limit that can be held (that is, If there is an increase in so-called “free space” that can be held by the first holding means or the second holding means), displaying that it can be held by both the first holding means and the second holding means reduces the interest. End up. In addition, if the average number of reservations is designed to be large, the winning probability in the lottery by the first lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700) and the second lottery means (second special symbol lottery means 710) must be lowered. It is well known that there is no design, so that the average number of reservations is not increased. This is because if the winning probability in the lottery by the first lottery means and the second lottery means is lowered, the interest will be reduced due to a decrease in the probability of occurrence of the special gaming state.

  Thus, the first holding means (the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the first special symbol holding number storage means 628) and the second holding means (the second special symbol holding counter 713 or the second special symbol holding number storage means 630). ) Is the sum of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number, the holding by the first holding means and the second holding means is the sum of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number. Since it is rare to be held up to the upper limit, the player is given the impression that the hold by the first holding means and the second holding means is not accumulated, and the interest is lowered. Accordingly, for the holdable information that is one of the hold-related information, each of the first hold means and the second hold means can hold up to a predetermined upper limit of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number (that is, the first hold means). By displaying in the hold display area 1150 only that the hold by the first hold means can be held to the first predetermined number in spite of the fact that both the first hold means and the second hold means are holdable) , Can reduce the impression that the reserve does not accumulate, and can suppress the decline of interest.

  Further, tentatively, the first hold means (first special symbol hold counter 703 or first special symbol hold number storage means 628) can hold up to the first predetermined number, and the second hold means (second In the case where both the hold by the special symbol hold counter 713 or the second special symbol hold number storage means 630) can be held up to the second predetermined number are displayed in the hold display area 1150, the hold number by the first hold means Is the upper limit of the first predetermined number and the number of hold by the second holding means is less than the upper limit of the second predetermined number, the hold display area 1150 displays that the hold can be held by the second holding means. . At this time, even if a game ball that has been driven into the game area 37 wins the first start port 390, the number of holds by the first holding means is the upper limit of the first predetermined number. does not change. For this reason, the player has the impression that even if the number of holds has not reached the upper limit, the number of holds will not increase even if the first start opening 390 is won, and the interest will be reduced. . Therefore, for the holdable information that is one of the hold-related information, each of the first hold means and the second hold means can hold up to a predetermined upper limit of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number. Regardless, by displaying in the hold display area 1150 only that the hold by the first hold means can be held up to the first predetermined number, such a problem can be solved and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[Configuration 5]
A game board in which a game area is formed and a game medium is driven toward the game area;
A first start port capable of accepting a game medium driven toward the game area;
Effect image display means having at least a game mode display area for displaying a predetermined game mode and a game information display area for displaying predetermined game information;
A first start detecting means for detecting that the game medium driven toward the game area is received by the first start opening; a first lottery for performing a lottery in response to detection of the game medium by the first start detecting means; A first game mode display control unit for displaying the game mode display area in a predetermined mode and deriving a lottery result by the first lottery unit; and a lottery result by the first lottery unit in the first game. A first holding means for holding within a first predetermined number of ranges to be derived to the first game state display area by the mode display control means, and the number information held by the first holding means is displayed in the game information display. A first game information display control means for displaying in the area, and a game display mode memory for storing a plurality of display modes derived to the game mode display area by the first game mode display control means First display mode determining means for selecting and determining a display mode to be derived to the game mode display area by the first game mode display control unit from among a plurality of display modes stored in the game display mode storage unit. And first game control means having at least special game execution means for executing a special game that can give a player a predetermined game value in response to winning the lottery by the first lottery means. A gaming machine with which
The game display mode storage means includes
Two or more winning display modes that are selected and determined only when the lottery result by the first lottery means is winning;
A display that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the first lottery means is out, corresponds to any one of the two or more winning display modes, and closely resembles the corresponding winning display mode over time Two or more unreachable display modes comprising modes;
It is displayed when the lottery result is out, and stores at least at least one out-of-reach display mode that is similar to the part of the reach out-of-display mode over time
The first display mode determination means selects and determines to perform display in the reach out-of-display mode in a lottery that is different from the lottery result by the first lottery means and the lottery result by the first lottery means is off. Only when it has a reach out-of-reach display mode selection determining means for selecting and determining a predetermined out-of-reach display mode from the two or more long reach out-of-display modes.
The gaming machine further includes
A second start port capable of accepting a game medium driven toward the game area;
A second start detecting means for detecting that the game medium driven toward the game area is received by the second start opening; a second lottery for performing a lottery in response to detection of the game medium by the second start detecting means; A second game mode display control unit for displaying a predetermined mode in the game mode display area and deriving a lottery result by the second lottery unit; and a lottery result by the second lottery unit in the second game. A second hold means for holding within a second predetermined number of ranges derived from the game display area by the form display control means, and the number-of-holds information held by the second hold means are displayed in the game information display area. A display mode derived to the first game mode display area by the second game information display control unit, and the second game mode display control unit. Second game control means having second display mode decision means for selecting determined from among the plurality of display modes to be stored in the unit, at least provided with a,
The special game state generation means executes a special game that allows a player to be given a predetermined game value in response to winning the lottery by the second lottery means,
The game display mode storage means includes
A plurality of display modes to be derived to the game mode display area by the second game mode display control means;
It is a display mode that is very similar to the winning display mode and has a shorter display time than the winning display mode, and is selected and determined only when the lottery result by the second lottery means is at least A special aspect,
A portion that is selected and determined when the lottery result by the second lottery means is out of order, corresponds to at least the two or more hit special display modes, and closely resembles a part of the corresponding hit special display mode over time Including two or more reach-off special display modes that are clearly different from the display mode.
The second display mode determining means, when the lottery result by the second lottery means is out, selects and determines a predetermined reach out special display mode from among the two or more reach out special display modes. It has an aspect selection determination means.

  According to this, the game board 5 includes a first start port 390, effect image display means (effect image display device 115), and first game control means (main control board 510, peripheral control board 610 and display device control). Substrate 116). The effect image display means has at least a game mode display area (common symbol display area 115c) and a game information display area (hold display area 1150). The first game control means includes first start detection means (step S1104), first lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700), and first game mode display control means (first special symbol image display control means). 614), first hold means (first special symbol hold counter 703 or first special symbol hold number storage means 628), first game information display control means (first hold information image display control means 6202), First display mode determining means 772, game display mode storage means, and special game execution means (big hit game execution means 515) are included. When the game medium is received at the first start port 390, it is detected by the first start detection means (step S1104), and the lottery is performed by the first lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700) accordingly. The lottery result by the first lottery means is displayed in a predetermined manner in the game information display area by the first game state display control means (first special symbol image display control means 614). The display of the lottery result by the first lottery means in the game information display area is held within the first predetermined number range by the first holding means (the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the first special symbol holding number storage means 628). Is done. The number-of-holds information held by the first holding means is displayed in the game information display area by the first game information display control means (first hold information image display control means 6202). The display mode derived in the game mode display area is selected and determined by the first display mode determination unit 772 from among a plurality of display modes stored in the game display mode storage unit (display mode storage unit 770). In addition, when the lottery by the first lottery means is won, a special game (a jackpot game) that can give a predetermined game value to the player is executed by the special game executing means (a jackpot game executing means 515). Further, the game board 5 includes a second start port (second start port 392 or third start port 394), second game control means (main control board 510, peripheral control board 610, and display device control board 116). , Is provided. The second game control means includes second start detection means (step S1101), second lottery means (second special symbol lottery means 710), and second game mode display control means (second special symbol image display control means). 615), second hold means (second special symbol hold counter 713 or second special symbol hold number storage means 630), second game information display control means (first hold information image display control means 6203), Second display mode determination means 778. When the game medium is received at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, it is detected by the second start detecting means (step S1101), and the lottery is performed by the second lottery means (second special symbol lottery means 710) accordingly. Done. The lottery result by the second lottery means is displayed in a predetermined manner in the game information display area by the second game state display control means (second special symbol image display control means 615). The display of the lottery result by the second lottery means in the game information display area is held within the second predetermined number range by the second holding means (the second special symbol holding counter 713 or the second special symbol holding number storage means 630). Is done. The number-of-holds information held by the second holding means is displayed in the game information display area by the second game information display control means (first hold information image display control means 6203). The game display mode storage unit 770 also stores a plurality of display modes derived to the game information display area by the second game information display control unit 504. The display mode derived in the game mode display area is selected and determined by the second display mode determination unit 778 from among a plurality of display modes stored in the game display mode storage unit (display mode storage unit 770). The special game executing means also executes the special game (big hit game) in response to winning the lottery by the second lottery means. The game display mode storage means 770 includes two or more hit display modes, two or more reach miss display modes, a miss display mode, two or more hit special display modes, and two or more reach miss special display modes. I remember it. The winning display mode is selected and determined only when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is winning. The reach out display mode is selected when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is out, and corresponds to any one of the two or more hit display modes, and the corresponding win display mode and time The display mode is very similar to the above. The outlier display mode is displayed when the lottery result is out of date, and resembles a part of the reach outlier display mode over time. The win special display mode is a display mode that is very similar to the win display mode and shorter in display time than the win display mode, and is selected only when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is win. It is determined. The reach out special display mode is selected and determined when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is out, and corresponds to at least two or more hit special display modes. It includes a part that resembles the part over time. Further, the display mode is clearly different from the out-of-display mode. Only when the result of the lottery by the first lottery means is out of order and when it is selected and decided to display in the lottery different from the lottery by the first lottery means, the display of the two or more reach out is displayed. Further, a predetermined out-of-reach display mode is selected and determined from the out-of-reach display mode selection determining unit (long reach out-of-line display mode selection determining unit 774). Further, when the lottery result by the second lottery means is out of the range, the display by the predetermined reach out special display mode is performed among the two or more reach out special display modes. Reach out special display mode selection determining means 780) selects and determines.

  Therefore, when the lottery result by the first lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700) is out of reach, the reach effect is performed only when the reach outage display mode is selected and determined by the lottery. When the lottery by the 2 lottery means (second special symbol lottery means 710) is out of reach, the reach effect is performed without performing the lottery. Thereby, since it can be interested in reach production, the fall of interest can be controlled.

  In addition, since the reach effect is performed when the game medium wins the second start opening 392, the generation of the reach effect is not left to the gaming machine as in the conventional gaming machine. That is, unlike conventional gaming machines, there is no correlation between the frequency of reach and the expectation that a special game will occur. On the contrary, since the player can feel that he / she can generate reach himself / herself, he / she can be interested in reach production and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the reach-removed special display mode selected and determined when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is out is selected and determined only when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is winning. Corresponds to the hit special mode. Moreover, it is very similar over time to a part of the hit special display mode. Thereby, when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived, it is possible to always have a sense of expectation of occurrence of a special game, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the reach out special display mode is clearly different from the out display mode. Therefore, when the reach out special display mode is displayed, it is not the out display mode, that is, the reach out special display mode. Since it can be grasped that any one of the reach effects is included, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Configuration 6]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 5,
The game mode display area is one common in which any one of the lottery results by the first lottery means and the lottery results by the second lottery means can be derived by a common symbol group consisting of a plurality of symbols. A symbol display area,
The game information display area is one hold display area capable of displaying both hold-related information relating to the first hold means and the second hold means,
A merged hold display control means for recognizing the hold-related information relating to the first hold means and the second hold means so as to be recognizable on the hold display means;
The merge hold display control means can recognize the derivation order derived to the common symbol display means when both the number of holds by the first hold means and the number of holds by the second hold means are 1 or more. And a merge pending order display control means.

  According to this, in the common symbol display area 115c, either the lottery result by the first lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700) or the lottery result by the second lottery means (second special symbol lottery means 710). One lottery result is derived by a symbol group consisting of a plurality of symbols. That is, the symbol group functions as a common symbol from which the lottery result by the first lottery means and the lottery result by the second lottery means can be derived. In the hold display area 1151, hold-related information and second hold means (second special symbol hold counter 713) related to the first hold means (first special symbol hold counter 703 or first special symbol hold number storage means 628) are displayed. Alternatively, both of the hold-related information relating to the second special symbol hold count storage means 630) are recognizablely displayed by the merge hold display control means 620. When both of the number of holds by the first holding means and the second holding means are 1 or more, the derivation order derived to the common symbol display area is the merge hold order display control means (merge hold order image display control means 6205). ) Is displayed in a recognizable manner.

  That is, the first lottery means includes the first lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700) and second lottery means (second special symbol lottery means 710). Since either one of the lottery result and the lottery result by the second lottery means is derived to the common symbol display area 115c, both the lottery result by the first lottery means and the lottery result by the second lottery means are derived. There is no such complexity, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Moreover, the lottery result by the first lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700) and the lottery result by the second lottery means (second special symbol lottery means 710) are derived as common symbols to the common symbol display area 115c. While the lottery result by the first lottery means and the lottery result by the second lottery means are derived one by one, the player does not feel uncomfortable that the other change has stopped, and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

In addition, one of the results corresponding to the lottery result by the first lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700) and the lottery result by the second lottery means (second special symbol lottery means 710) is used as a common symbol. When derived and displayed on the display area 115c, the player is interested in which lottery means the lottery result is derived from. This is because, when the lottery result by the second lottery means is derived, the reach effect is always performed. Therefore, when both the number of holdings by the first holding unit 428 and the number of holdings by the second holding unit 430 are 1 or more, the derivation order derived in the symbol display area 115c is displayed in a recognizable manner. Reduction can be suppressed.

  The “holding related information” is, for example, the first holding means (the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the first special symbol holding number storage means 628) or the second holding means (the second special symbol holding counter 713 or the first holding information). 2 special symbol hold number storage means 630) hold number information indicating the number held, hold information indicating that the first hold means or the second hold means can hold, and hold by the first hold means The lottery result based on the above and the lottery result based on the hold by the second holding means correspond to the hold derivation order indicating the order in which the common symbol display means (common symbol display area 115c) is derived.

[Configuration 7]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 6,
The first display mode indicating that the merge hold order display control means is held by the first hold means and the second display mode indicating that the merge hold order display control means are held by the second hold means, The display is arranged in a line in the hold display area in the order of hold by the first hold means and the second hold means.

  According to this, the first display means and the second holding means (second special holding means (second special symbol holding counter 703 or the first special symbol holding number storage means 628) indicating that it is held by the first holding means (first special symbol hold counter 703 or first special symbol hold number storage means 628) The second display mode indicating that the symbol is held by the symbol hold counter 713 or the second special symbol hold number storage means 630 is in the order in which the second display mode is held by the first hold means and the second hold means (that is, the first start) In the order in which the detection means (step S1104) or the second start detection means (step S1101) detects that the game ball has been received by the first start port 390, the second start port 392, or the third start port 394), hold In the display area 1150, they are displayed in a line.

  Therefore, since the lottery results are derived in the common symbol display area (common symbol display area 115c) in the order of the display modes arranged in a row, the order of the lottery results derived to the common symbol display means can be determined at a glance. Easy to grasp. As a result, the player can concentrate on the game (for example, concentrating on the process in which the game balls are won at the start openings 390, 392, 394 or the lottery results are derived on the common symbol display means). Yes), and can suppress the decrease in interest.

[Configuration 8]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 6 or Configuration 7,
The merge hold display control means has a first predetermined number and a second predetermined number of predetermined predetermined numbers for the holdable information which is one of the hold related information. It has a holdable information display control means for displaying in the hold display area only that the first hold means can hold up to the first predetermined number although it can be held up to an upper limit. To do.

  According to this, with respect to the holdable information that is one of the hold related information, the first hold means can hold despite the fact that both the first hold means and the second hold means can still hold. Is displayed in the hold display area 1150 by the holdable information display control means 6201.

  According to this, similarly to the operational effect described in the configuration 4, each of the first holding means and the second holding means is set to a predetermined first predetermined number for the holdable information that is one of the hold related information. And hold up to the upper limit of the second predetermined number (that is, both the first holding means and the second holding means can hold), the hold by the first holding means can be held up to the first predetermined number. By displaying only that in the hold display area 1150, it is possible to reduce the impression that the hold is not stored, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, similarly to the operation and effect described in the configuration 4, when it can be held only by the second holding means, there is no impression that the number of holds does not increase even if the first starting port 390 is won. Reduction can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the said structures 1-8, when the lottery by a 2nd lottery means (2nd special symbol lottery means 710) is unsuccessful, the lottery of whether to perform reach production is not always performed. However, it is not limited that the lottery for determining whether or not to perform the reach effect is not 100%, and the impression that the reach effect is always performed when winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. As long as the player receives it. In addition, although a lottery is performed as to whether or not a reach effect is performed when winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the reach effect is selected and determined with a probability close to 100% or 100%. May be.

  “Extremely similar” means very similar, but does not exclude the same. Therefore, the “similar display mode” includes both the same display mode and a very similar display mode. It should be noted that “extremely similar” may be similar to the level that the player feels very similar.

[Configuration 9]
In the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1 to 8,
The reach out-of-reach display mode is a long reach out-of-display mode,
The short reach out display mode in which the game display mode storage means is selected and determined when the lottery result by the first lottery means is out, and includes a part that closely resembles part of the long reach out display mode over time In addition,
The hit display mode, the long reach off display mode, the short reach off display mode, the off display mode, the hit special mode and the reach off special mode are all started after the variable display of a plurality of symbols is started. A display mode for stopping display,
The hit display mode is
After the variable display of two or more N symbols of the plurality of symbols is started, the symbol variation until (N-1) symbols of the N symbols that are performing the variable display are stopped and displayed. Period,
It has at least a long reach variation period until it reaches reach when the (N-1) symbols are stopped and displayed, and the remaining one final stop symbol is stopped and displayed,
The long-reach out display mode is similar to the winning display mode over time by having a symbol variation period that is very similar to the symbol variation period and a long reach variation period that is very similar to the long reach variation period. And
The short reach out display mode has a symbol variation period that is very similar to the symbol variation period, and a short reach variation period that has a shorter variation time than the long reach period,
The outlier display mode consists of a symbol variation period that is very similar to the symbol variation period,
The hit special mode includes the symbol display short period with a variable period shorter than the symbol variable period, and a long reach variation period that is very similar to the long reach variation period, and the hit display mode in the entire display mode. It ’s very similar,
The reach out special display mode has a symbol change short period that is very similar to the symbol change short time, and a short reach change period that is very similar to the short reach change period, and a change period of the reach out special display mode. Is substantially the same as the display period of the outlier display mode.

According to this, since the fluctuation period of the reach-out special display mode is substantially the same as the display period of the out-of-display mode, the reach effect can be performed without delaying the progress of the game, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. In addition, the short reach fluctuation period in the reach out special display mode has a short reach fluctuation period that is very similar to the short reach fluctuation period in the short reach out display mode, so the reach out special is not shortened. The change period of the display mode and the display period of the outlier display mode can be set to substantially the same time. In addition, by preventing the game progress from being delayed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine, which is also beneficial for pachinko halls.

  The winning display mode has a symbol variation period, and the long reach out-of-range display mode has a symbol variation period that is very similar to the symbol variation period of the winning display mode. Further, since the out-of-display mode is composed of a symbol variation period that is very similar to the symbol variation period, the short reach out-of-display mode has a symbol variation period that is very similar to the symbol variation period and a short reach variation period. In the short reach deviation variation display mode, the variation period is longer than the short display variation period by the short reach variation period. That is, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived, it cannot be understood that the reach effect is not performed until the symbol variation period ends. Further, since the display mode of the short reach out special display mode is clearly different from the out display mode, it can be understood that the lottery result is not derived by the first special symbol lottery means 700. Thereby, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived, even if the symbol variation short period elapses, it is not determined from the viewpoint of the player. Thereby, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

[Configuration 10]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 9,
The symbol variation mode in the symbol variation short period of the short reach off special display mode and the symbol variation mode in the symbol variation period of the winning display mode are different from each other.

  According to this, as soon as the change of the symbol is started, the lottery result is derived by the first lottery means (first special symbol lottery means 700) or the second lottery means (second special symbol lottery means 710). It can be grasped whether it is the derivation of the lottery result by. The win display mode, the long reach off display mode, the short reach off display mode, and the off display mode, which are display modes for deriving the lottery result by the first lottery means, all have a symbol variation period, The winning special display mode and the short reach off special display mode, which are display modes for deriving the lottery result by the second lottery means, both have a symbol variation short period whose variation period is shorter than the symbol variation period. Are different in that However, it is possible to grasp whether the lottery result is derived by the first lottery means or the lottery result is derived by the second lottery means almost simultaneously with the start of the fluctuation of the symbols without waiting for the end of these fluctuation periods. As a result, when the lottery result by the second lottery means is derived, it is possible to grasp that the reach effect is performed almost simultaneously with the start of the fluctuation, so that the fluctuation can be expected and the decrease in the interest is suppressed. it can.

In this case, as a symbol variation mode in the symbol variation period, for example, a scroll variation mode is conceivable, and as a symbol variation mode in the symbol variation short period, for example, a rotation variation or a symbol turning variation is conceivable. Rotational variation is a mode in which, for example, the front and back surfaces of a symbol are alternately rotated without scrolling the symbol, and the pattern turning variation is the pattern that is being displayed and behind the turned symbol. This is a mode in which symbols in are sequentially displayed. Note that both the rotation variation and the pattern turning variation change only the symbol displayed at that position without changing the symbol display position. The time required can be reduced.
[Configuration 11]
In the gaming machine according to Configuration 9 or Configuration 10,
In the outlier display mode, the N symbols that are variably displayed are sequentially stopped and displayed one by one,
The short reach off special display mode is characterized in that (N-1) symbols out of N symbols that are variably displayed are stopped and displayed almost simultaneously.

  According to this, in the out-of-display mode, by sequentially stopping and displaying the N symbols that are variably displayed one by one, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that may become reach over time, In the short reach off special display mode, (N-1) symbols out of N symbols are stopped and displayed almost simultaneously, so that the time from the start of change to reach can be shortened.

[Configuration 12]
In the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1 to 11,
When the number of holdings by the first holding unit is zero and the number of holdings by the second holding unit is zero, the holdable information display control unit is a number corresponding to the first predetermined number and Displaying a first display mode indicating that the first holding means can hold the first display means so as to be arranged in a line;
When the number of holds by the first holding means is zero and the number of holds by the second holding means is N (N is a natural number not less than 1 and not more than a first predetermined number), the second game information display The control means displays N second display forms indicating that the second hold means is held by the second holding means adjacent to the end position of the first display form arranged in the one row, and The first hold information display control means sets the first display mode to a number corresponding to the first predetermined number and is adjacent to the Nth second display mode from the extreme end position. From the position, the display is arranged so as to be arranged in a line together with the second display mode.

  According to this, the 1st reservation means (the 1st special symbol reservation counter 703 or the 1st special symbol reservation number storage means 628) and the 2nd reservation means (the 2nd special symbol reservation counter 713 or the 2nd special symbol reservation number storage means) When any number of holdings in 630) is zero, a number (for example, four) of first display modes corresponding to the first predetermined number are displayed in a line. Then, the game ball wins the second starting port (the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 in this embodiment), the number of holdings by the first holding unit is zero and the holding by the second holding unit When the number reaches N, N second display modes are displayed adjacent to each other from the endmost position of the first display mode arranged in a row, and N from the endmost position. A first predetermined number of first display modes are displayed adjacent to each other from positions adjacent to the second display mode of the eyes. At this time, the N second display modes and the first predetermined number of first display modes are displayed together so as to be arranged in a line. That is, from the viewpoint of the player, the second display mode is displayed at the endmost position, and N second display modes are displayed adjacent to each other together with the second display mode, and the first hold It appears that all of the first display modes that were displayed when the number of holdings of both the means and the second holding means are zero are displayed shifted (slid) along the arranged columns. .

  Therefore, the first holding means (the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the first special symbol holding number storage means 628) and the second holding means (the second special symbol holding counter 713 or the second special symbol holding number storage means 630). The number of the first display modes corresponding to the first predetermined number displayed when any number of holds is zero is the number of holds by the first hold means is zero and the number of holds by the second hold means When N becomes N, N second display modes and a first predetermined number of first display modes are displayed. Thereby, since it seems that the number of possible holding by the 1st holding means and the 2nd holding means increased, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  Moreover, the first holding means (the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the first special symbol holding) is held by the second holding means (the second special symbol holding counter 713 or the second special symbol holding number storage means 630). All of the first display modes that were displayed when the number of holdings of the number storage unit 628) and the second holding unit are zero appear to slide along the arranged columns. Therefore, it can be easily grasped that there is no change in the number that can be held by the first holding means, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine described in Configuration 12,
The hold display area has a number of hold storage display portions corresponding to the sum of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number;
The first game information display control means and the second game information display control means respectively change the first display mode and the second display mode to any one of the plurality of reserved storage display units. It is preferable to display.

  That is, the number of reserved storage display units (a first reserved storage display unit 1151a to a fourth reserved storage display unit 1151d and a fifth reserved storage display) corresponding to the sum of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number. 1152a to 8th on-hold storage display section 1152d) are arranged in a line, and any one of the plurality of on-hold storage display sections has a first display mode or a second display mode. Will be displayed.

[Configuration 13]
In the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1 to 12,
The merge pending display control means further includes an identification code display control means for displaying a predetermined identification code on the first display mode and the second display mode,
The identification code display control means,
When the number of holdings by the first holding unit is zero and the number of holdings by the second holding unit is zero, from the identification code corresponding to 1 to the identification code corresponding to the first predetermined number, In order from the end of the
Corresponds to the sum of the first predetermined number and the N from the identification code corresponding to 1 when the number of holdings by the first holding unit is zero and the number of holdings by the second holding unit becomes N Up to the identification code to be displayed is sequentially displayed from the position of the one end.

  According to this, when both the number of holdings of the first holding means (first special symbol holding counter 703) and the second holding means (second special symbol holding counter 713) is zero, from the identification code corresponding to 1. Up to an identification code corresponding to a first predetermined number (for example, four) is displayed with being attached to the first display mode in order from the end position where the first display mode is displayed. Then, when a game ball is won at the first starting port 390, the number of holds by the first holding means is zero and the number of holds by the second holding means is N, the identification code corresponding to 1 Up to an identification code corresponding to the sum of the first predetermined number and N (for example, 4 + N) is displayed in the second display mode and the first display mode. That is, when a game ball wins the first starting port 390, the number of holdings by the first holding means is zero and the number of holdings by the second holding means becomes N, the position from the end position (first (1 predetermined number + N) In the first display mode displayed, the identification code corresponding to the sum of the first predetermined number and N (for example, 6 if the first predetermined number = 4 and N = 2). Is displayed.

  Accordingly, the first holding means (second special symbol holding counter 713) is used even though the number of possible holdings by the first holding means (first special symbol holding counter 703) is the first predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to give the player an impression that the sum of the first predetermined number and N can be held, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that the “identification code” means the number of holdings by the first holding means when it is held only by the first holding means (first special symbol holding counter 703), and the second holding means (second special symbol holding counter). 713) is held only in the second holding means, the derivation order derived to the common symbol display area 115c when held in both the first holding means and the second holding means, It means the code for grasping.

  Further, “the identification code corresponding to the first predetermined number from the identification code corresponding to 1” is, for example, “1, 2,... 4 (corresponding to the first predetermined number)”, “A, B. (Corresponding to the first predetermined number) "or" a, ro ... ni (corresponding to the first predetermined number) ", the first predetermined number or the first 1 means an identification code indicating a predetermined number.

  It should be noted that the “second start port” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “second start port 392 or the third start port 394 (whichever is acceptable)” in the present embodiment. The “first game mode display means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “common symbol display area 115c” of the present embodiment. The “second game mode display means” described in each configuration corresponds to the “common symbol display area 115c” of the present embodiment. The “first game information display means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “hold display area 1150” of the present embodiment. The “second game information display means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “hold display area 1150” of the present embodiment. The “game control means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “main control board 510, the peripheral control board 610, and the display device control board 116” of the present embodiment. The “first start detection means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to “Step S1104” in the present embodiment. The “first lottery means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “first special symbol lottery means 700” of the present embodiment. The “first game mode display control means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “first special symbol image display control means 614” of the present embodiment. The “first hold means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “first special symbol hold counter 703 or the first special symbol hold number storage means 628” of the present embodiment. The “first game information display control means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “first hold information image display control means 6202” of the present embodiment. The “second lottery means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “second special symbol lottery means 710” of the present embodiment. The “second game mode display control means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “second special symbol image display control means 615” of the present embodiment. The “second hold means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “second special symbol hold counter 713 or the second special symbol hold number storage means 630” of the present embodiment. The “second game information display control means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “second hold information image display control means 6203” of the present embodiment. The “game display mode storage unit” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “display mode storage unit 770” of the present embodiment. The “special game” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “big hit game” in the present embodiment. The “special game execution means” described in each configuration corresponds to the “big hit game execution means 515” in the present embodiment. The “reach out of display mode selection determination means” described in each configuration above is the present embodiment. Corresponds to “long reach out-of-range display mode selection determining means 774”. The “reach out of special display mode selection determining unit” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “short reach out of special display mode selection determining unit 780” of the present embodiment. The “common symbol display means” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “common symbol display area 115c” of the present embodiment. The “game medium” described in each of the above configurations corresponds to the “game ball” of the present embodiment.

  Moreover, although this invention is described in said preferable embodiment, this invention is not restrict | limited only to it. Various embodiments are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.

  For example, the effect image display device in the above-described embodiment is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a gaming machine other than a pachinko machine, for example, a pachislot machine, a gaming machine that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, etc. The invention can be applied.

  In other words, a pachinko machine is a game in which an input medium such as a game ball that is a medium that a player inserts into the game machine and a game medium that is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player are the same. This is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball that has been inserted. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, center objects, display means, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entrance for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage opening, an arrival opening, etc., a rail for guiding the game ball from the launching device to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the entrance and according to the entrance mode of the game balls to a plurality of entrances.

  There are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally represented by what is referred to as “digipachi”, “entrance state detection means for detecting the entrance state to the entrance (ie, game state) Detection means), lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a ball is detected by the entrance state detection means, and special symbol display means for changing the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. Or “additional effect image display means for displaying a decorative symbol sequence composed of a plurality of decorative symbols and causing characters or the like to appear at a predetermined timing” , Which is generally represented by what is referred to as a “multi-function machine”, comprising a lottery means for performing lottery by distributing game balls in an accessory and lottery means for performing lottery by winning at the start opening. ”, Represented by what is generally called“ Alepatchi ”“ For example, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16 games, and the game balls are placed in a plurality of entrances in one game. In accordance with this, “a payout of a predetermined number of game balls” can be exemplified.

  On the other hand, with a pachislot machine, a medal that is a game medium is inserted, and after inserting the medal, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the operation of the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). It is a slot machine with a stop operation function that performs a substantial game of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time of the fluctuation stop of the symbol row satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large amount of medals. In addition, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined is a plurality of (for example, five) game balls that are used as one unit of input medium. ) Is variably displayed in accordance with the operation of), and thereafter, the variation of the symbol string is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time when the variation of the symbol sequence is stopped satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large number of medals. In this case, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, it seems that there is no gaming medium at first glance in a gaming machine that does not play a substantial game depending on the medium to be inserted, such as a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. However, even in such a gaming machine, it can be assumed that the game content played using a game ball or other appropriate article is included in the entire game content. Therefore, even such a gaming machine can be a target of a gaming machine in which a game is played using a gaming medium.

  In addition, the effect display device in the above-described embodiment is preferably a liquid crystal display device, but is not necessarily limited to a liquid crystal display device. It may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT. That is, as long as the first display mode, the third display mode, and the second display mode can be displayed and any of these modes can be hidden, the mode is not limited.

It is a perspective view which shows the state by which the main body frame was opened by the one side of the outer frame of a pachinko machine, and the front frame was opened by the one side of the main body frame. It is a front view which shows the whole front side of a pachinko machine. It is an enlarged front view which shows the structure of a game area | region. It is a rear view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine from upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the back cover body, various control boards, etc. from the perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which various members were assembled | attached to the main body frame of the pachinko machine from diagonally upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows a main-body frame simple substance from diagonally upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows the game board with which various control board boxes were mounted | worn from lower right back. It is an enlarged front view which shows the structure of the game board which has a game area | region. It is a perspective view which shows a game board from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows a game board from diagonally forward, Comprising: It is a perspective view which enabled visual recognition of the 1st warp and the 2nd warp by removing a decoration cover. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the periphery of a 1st warp and a 2nd warp. It is the figure which showed the positional relationship of a light transmissive member, a 1st warp, and a 2nd warp. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board containing the effect for an effect. It is a perspective view which shows the game board base which supports a game board from the front upper front. (A) It is an enlarged front view of the game board 5. FIG. (B) It is the sectional view on the AA line shown by (a). It is the perspective view which looked at the opening / closing device for production | presentation, the accessory guidance path, the distribution mechanism, and the production | presentation accessory from the upper left. It is a top view of an accessory guide path, a distribution mechanism, and a production | presentation accessory, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the aspect by which a game ball is distributed by the distribution mechanism. It is a top view of an accessory guide path, a distribution mechanism, and a production | presentation accessory, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the aspect by which a game ball is distributed by the distribution mechanism. It is a top view of an accessory guide path, a distribution mechanism, and a production | presentation accessory, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the aspect by which a game ball is distributed by the distribution mechanism. It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the accessory container of a production | presentation accessory. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a main substrate. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a peripheral substrate. It is a functional block diagram which shows roughly the functional structure of the peripheral control board in a main board | substrate and a peripheral board | substrate. (A) It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the accessory container of a production | presentation accessory, Comprising: It is a figure which shows that the 1st production eaves inclines downward toward the 1st performance exit. (B) It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the accessory container of a production | presentation accessory, Comprising: It is a figure which shows that the 1st production | presentation heel inclines downward toward the 2nd production | presentation 樋 guidance port. It is the figure which looked at the production image display device from the front. It is the figure which looked at the production image display device from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of the periphery control board in a periphery board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main system process which CPU511 mounted in the main control board of a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the memory | storage area | region concerned with a reservation order. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st, 2nd, 3rd starting opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time variation pattern table setting process per 1st special symbol length. It is a list figure which shows the variation pattern selected in the pattern table setting process at the time of the 1st special symbol length. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time variation pattern table setting process per 2nd special symbol length. It is a list figure which shows the fluctuation pattern selected in the 2nd special symbol length per hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a short hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the fluctuation pattern selected in the short hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process and the small hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table setting process at the time of the 1st special symbol removal. FIG. 52 is a flowchart continued from A of FIG. 51. FIG. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern selected when it is judged as reach in the 1st special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd special symbol change time fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart continuing from C of FIG. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern selected when it is judged that it is reach in the 2nd special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selected when it is not judged as reach in the 1st special symbol deviation time fluctuation pattern table setting process and the 2nd special symbol loss time fluctuation pattern table setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory big hit control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory small hit control process. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the change time concerning the change pattern of the detachment without the reach production at the time short-time function non-operation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the fluctuation time concerning the deviation fluctuation pattern which does not accompany the reach production at the time short-time function operation. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of a decoration symbol in the case of deriving | leading out the lottery result by a 1st special symbol lottery means to an effect image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of a decoration symbol in the case of deriving | leading out the lottery result by a 2nd special symbol lottery means to an effect image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of a decoration symbol in the case of deriving the said lottery result to an effect image display apparatus, when the lottery result by a special symbol lottery means is a short hit or a small hit. It is a functional block diagram which shows mainly the function which concerns on display mode determination among the functional structures of a main control board. It is a time chart which expressed the display mode of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol in time series.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Front frame 5 Game board 6 Bottom receiving plate 7 Hinge mechanism 11 Front frame body 12 Game board installation frame 13 Mechanism installation body 14 Outer frame side hinge tool 15 Main body frame side hinge tool 16 Speaker box Part 17 Speaker mounting version 18 Speaker 19 Launch rail 30 Lower front plate 31 Lower tray 32 Operation handle 33 Ashtray 34 Ball discharge lever 35 Effect selection switch 36 Hinge mechanism 37 Game area 37a Game area 38 Open window 39 Window frame 50 Transparent plate 51 Upper Plate 52 Side decoration device 53 Acoustic decoration device 54 Side decoration body 55 Lens 56 Transparent cover body 57 Speaker 58 Speaker cover 70 Locking device 71 Closing tool 72 Body frame locking hook 73 Closing tool 74 Door locking hook 75 Cylinder lock 76 Outer rail 77 Inner rail 78 Guide rail 79 Front component member 80 Game area forming wall 82 Normal view Indicator 84 First special symbol indicator 86 Second special symbol indicator 88 First special symbol hold indicator 90 Second special symbol hold indicator 92 Normal symbol hold indicator 115 Production image display device 115a First determination result display Area 115b Second determination result display area 115c Common symbol display area 116 Display device control board 117 Display device control board box 118 Box mounting base 130 Peripheral control board box 132 Main control board box 133 Tank mounting section 134 Rail mounting section 135 Dispensing device Mounting part 136 Ball tank 137 Bottom plate part 138 Discharge port 139 Rail component 150 Tank rail 151 Front wall part 152 Rear wall part 155 Rail shelf 156 Rectifier 157 Shaft 158 Rail receiving part 170 Ball delivery device 172 Delivery motor 173 Opening part 192 Launch motor 193 Mounting board 194 Projector unit 195 Power supply board 196 Power supply board box 197 Discharge control board 198 Discharge control board box 199 Power relay terminal board 210 Rear cover body 211 Cover hinge mechanism 212 Rear wall part 213 Peripheral wall part 213a Wall part 213b Wall part 213c Upper side wall part 214 Hinge body 215 Hinge pin 216 Hinge body 217 Elastic closing body 218 Inspection connector 230 Heat radiation hole 231 Heat radiation hole 232 Heat radiation hole 233 Sealing portion 237 Code holder 238 Power distribution board 239 Board connector 252 Interface board 253 Lower plate ball derivative 254 Substrate box 300 Center accessory 301 Opening 302 Center illumination unit 304 Center decoration lamp 306 First warp inlet 308 Second warp inlet 310 Second warp guide piece 312 First warp outlet 314 Second warp Exit 316 First warp 318 Second warp 330 First stage 332 Peak 334 Valley 336 First warp outlet side end 338 First warp counter-exit side end 340 Second start port guide groove 342 Second stage guide groove 350 Second stage 352 High platform part 354 Curved part 356 Second warp outlet side end part 358 Second warp counter-exit side end part 360 Front inclined groove 362 First start port guide port guide groove 364 Stage partition wall 366 Communication part 368 First start Mouth guide port 370 Frame-shaped decorative body 370a Lower frame 370c Right frame 370b Left frame 372 Opening 374 First start port guide path 376 Third stage 378 Front guide groove 379 Electric decoration member 380 Light source 382 Base 386 Decoration cover 388 Light transmission member 390 First start port 392 Second start port 394 Third start port 396 Pair of movable pieces 397 Opening / closing device 39 Opening / closing device for production 400 Opening / closing device for special game 402 Passage gate 404 General prize opening 420 Production role 422 Performance object housing 424 Figure 426 Production 樋 428 First production 樋 430 Support shaft 432 First performance outlet 434 Second production Samurai guide port 436 Second outlet 440 Accessory guide path 450 Sorting mechanism 452 Solenoid 454 Game ball holding member 456 Connecting member 458 Pin 480 Game board base 500 Main board 502 First special symbol display control means 504 Second special symbol Display control means 508 Merge hold order display control means 510 Main control board 511 CPU
512 ROM
513 RAM
5131 Special symbol random number storage area 5131a First storage area 5131b Second storage area 5131c Third storage area 5131d Fourth storage area 5131e Fifth storage area 5131f Sixth storage area 5131g Seventh storage area 5131h Eighth storage area 5132 Processing area 514 Small hit game execution means 515 Big hit game execution means 516 Normal symbol display control means 518 Normal symbol hold display control means 520 Dispensing control board 522 CPU
524 ROM
526 RAM
530 Lower plate full switch 532 Firing control board 534 External terminal board 536 Inner frame opening switch 538 Door opening switch 550 Panel relay terminal board 552 Production switchgear relay terminal board 554 Big hit game switchgear relay terminal board 560 Gate sensor 562 General Winning mouth sensor 568 Normal symbol / special symbol display board 570 Effect opening / closing device count sensor 572 Special game opening / closing solenoid 574 Normal electric accessory solenoid 576 Special game opening / closing device count sensor 578 Effect opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 580 First Start port sensor 582 Second start port sensor 584 Third start port sensor 586 All winning ports winning number detection sensor 600 Peripheral board 610 Peripheral control board 611 CPU
612 ROM
613 RAM
614 First special symbol image display control means 615 Second special symbol image display control means 616 Production image display control means 618 Sound source IC
619 ROM
620 Merge hold display control means 626 Merge hold order storage means 628 First special symbol hold number storage means 630 Second special symbol hold number storage means 632 CPU
634 RAM
636 ROM
638 VDP
639 Image ROM
640 Frame decoration relay terminal plate 642 Frame decoration lamp 650 Lamp drive board 652 Panel decoration lamp 654 Discharge port sensor 658 Rotation part motor 660 Rotation part motor sensor 662 Center decoration drive part relay terminal board 664 Rotation part lower LED board 666 Sphere distribution part motor Sensor 668 Ball distributing unit motor 670 Rotating unit LED board 700 First special symbol lottery means 702 First special symbol per-determination random number extracting unit 703 First special symbol holding counter 704 First special symbol success / failure determining unit 706 Special symbol normal time Hit determination table 708 Special symbol probability change time determination table 710 Second special symbol lottery means 712 Second special symbol hit determination random number extraction means 713 Second special symbol hold counter 714 Second special symbol success / failure determination means 720 Normal symbol lottery Means 722 Normal symbol per judgment Random number extracting means 723 Normal symbol hold counter 724 Normal symbol success / failure determining means 726 Normal symbol normal per hour determination table 727 Normal symbol short per hour determination table 728 Third start opening / closing control means 730 Second special symbol hold display control means 732 Small hit game execution means 734 Probability game execution means 736 Time-short game execution means 738 Opening / closing operation control means 740 Reservation order storage means 746 Command transmission means 750 Command reception means 760 Effect lottery means 762 Effect accessory action execution means 770 Display mode storage means 772 First display mode determining means 774 Second display mode determining means 1150 Reserved display area 1151 First reserved display area 1151a First reserved storage display section 1151b Second reserved storage display section 1151c Third reserved storage display section 1151d Fourth hold storage display section 152 2nd reserved display area 1152a 5th reserved memory display part 1152b 6th reserved memory display part 1152c 7th reserved memory display part 1152d 8th reserved memory display part 1153 Decorative design 3861 Warp visual recognition hole 3862 Warp visual recognition hole 3881 Plane portion 3882 End portion 3981 Production large prize opening 3982 Opening / closing door 4001 Big hit gaming big prize opening 4002 Opening / closing door 4221 Drop opening 4241 One hand 4261 Right end 4262 Left end 4281 Right end 4282 Left end 4521 Plunger 6201 Reservable information image display control means 6202 First hold information image display control means 6203 Second hold information image display control means 6204 Identification code image display control means 6205 Merge hold order image display control means

Claims (3)

Display means for displaying a predetermined effect image;
A startup port capable of receiving the game media driven toward the game area,
And line cormorant extracted players stage a lottery in Jo Tokoro of winning probability based on the fact that the game medium that has been driven toward the gaming area has been accepted before KiHajime dynamic opening,
And Table示制your means you derive the lottery result of the previous Ki抽 player stage and performs a predetermined display performance in front Symbol display means,
A jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game advantageous to the player based on winning the lottery,
With
The display control means includes
Reach production control means for performing reach production only when the lottery result by the lottery means is win and when the lottery result by the lottery means is lost, the reach lottery of whether or not to perform reach production is won ,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is lost, unless the reach lottery is won, the non-reach losing effect control means for performing the lose effect without performing the reach effect;
Unless the lottery result by the lottery means is win or the reach lottery is won, the gaming machine in which the lose effect is always performed without the reach effect,
Although the lottery is always performed based on the reception of the game medium at the start opening, an emergency start opening that is more difficult to receive the game medium than the start opening is provided, and the game medium is stored in the emergency start opening. An emergency lottery is performed with a predetermined winning probability when accepted, and when the emergency lottery is won, the jackpot game is configured to be executed,
The display control means includes
When the game medium is accepted at the start opening, unless the lottery result by the lottery means wins or wins the reach lottery, the reach effect is always displayed without the reach effect,
When a game medium is received at the emergency start port, which is more difficult to accept game media than the start port, regardless of the result of the emergency lottery, and without performing a reach lottery whether or not to perform a reach effect, A gaming machine characterized by having means for always performing reach production . The lottery means obtains a random number based on acceptance of a game medium to the start port, and performs the lottery using the random number.
The gaming machine according to claim 1. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is a liquid crystal display.